Garmin G1000 - Piper PA-32 Pilot's Guide

G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide Piper PA-32 Saratoga
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support or view
warranty information at flygarmin.com.
190-02692-00
Revision A
Piper PA-32 Saratoga
System Software Version 2824.02 or later
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2020 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 2824.02 or later for the G1000 Piper PA-32 Saratoga Series. Some
differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support or view warranty information at flygarmin.com.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or
stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission
to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium
to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete
text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision
hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® G1000®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin
SVT™ is a trademark of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express
permission of Garmin.
Skywatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. Ryan®, TCAD® and Avidyne® are registered
trademarks of Avidyne Corporation. CO Guardian is a trademark of CO Guardian, Inc. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark
of Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc. Becker®
is a registered trademark of Becker Flugfunkwerk GmbH. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Wi-Fi® is a
registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Sirius, XM, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. and
its subsidiaries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin
is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make
any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA
be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related
documentation, even if AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User
agrees not to sue AOPA and, to the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action,
claims or losses related to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or
exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not
apply to you.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses
related to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some
jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the
above limitations or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not operate this equipment without first obtaining qualified instruction.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation.
Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be
considered only an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of
hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict
current weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining
separation from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources
and cannot independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Do not rely on the displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) as the sole source of obstacle
and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum
clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with
vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and heading indications in the following geographic
areas (due to variations in the earth’s magnetic field): North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity
of the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
vi
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: Do not allow repairs to be made by anyone other than an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the
aircraft.
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card
other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
vii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
ƒƒ It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
ƒƒ Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
ƒƒ Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
pertinent aircraft documents and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and
installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed
in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at flygarmin.com by selecting
‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to flygarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
viii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Electronic aeronautical charts displayed on this system have been shown to meet the guidance in AC
120-76D as a Type B Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) for FliteCharts and ChartView. The accuracy of the charts
is subject to the chart data provider. Own-ship position on airport surface charts cannot be guaranteed to
meet the accuracy specified in AC 120-76D. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary source
of aeronautical charts, such as traditional paper charts or an additional electronic display, necessary on the
aircraft and available to the pilot. If the secondary source of aeronautical charts is a Portable Electronic
Device (PED), its use must be consistent with the guidance in AC 120-76D.
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special Procedures. Prior
to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization, training, and possession of the
corresponding current, and legitimately-sourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special
Procedure in the navigation database DOES NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: The nose of the ‘own ship’ symbol represents the location of the aircraft. The center of any traffic
symbol represents the location of that traffic. The traffic and own ship symbols are an abstract representation
and do not reflect the physical extent of the aircraft/traffic, and should not replace other methods for
identifying traffic.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby
thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of
two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may appear
as a partial symbol.
NOTE: Lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of according
to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/en-US/
company/environment/recycling
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Operate G1000 system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
ix
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
Blank Page
x
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ
THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the software
embedded in the Garmin Product (the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title,
ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You
acknowledge that the Software is the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of
America copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of
the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains
a valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify,
reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any derivative
works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in violation of the export control
laws of the United States of America.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
xi
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Blank Page
xii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02692-00
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Revision
A
Date
2/21/20
Page Range
Description
All
Initial Release for GDU 15.12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
xiii
REVISION INFORMATION
Blank Page
xiv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description...............................................1
Line Replaceable Units..........................................2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards......................................4
Applying Power to the System.............................5
System Operation.................................................6
Normal Display Operation....................................................6
Reversionary Display Operation...........................................6
System Annunciations..........................................................7
AHRS Operation...................................................................9
GPS Receiver Operation.....................................................11
1.6 System Controls..................................................16
PFD/MFD Controls..............................................................16
Softkey Function................................................................18
1.7 Accessing System Functionality..........................23
Menus................................................................................23
Data Entry..........................................................................23
Page Groups.......................................................................24
System Setup and Status Pages..........................................26
System Utilities..................................................................35
1.8 Display Backlighting...........................................41
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments...............................................46
Airspeed Indicator..............................................................46
Attitude Indicator...............................................................48
Altimeter............................................................................49
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI).............................................52
Vertical Deviation...............................................................52
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)....................................53
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)........................................58
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data...................................65
Temperature Displays.........................................................65
Wind Data..........................................................................65
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications................................66
2.3 Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
(Optional)....................................................................68
SVT Operation....................................................................69
SVT Features......................................................................70
Field of View......................................................................79
2.4 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions.........81
Marker Beacon Annunciations...........................................81
Altitude Alerting.................................................................81
Low Altitude Annunciation.................................................82
Minimum Altitude Alerting.................................................82
190-02692-00 Rev. A
2.5 Abnormal Operations..........................................84
Abnormal GPS Conditions..................................................84
Unusual Attitudes..............................................................85
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 Engine Display....................................................90
3.2 Engine Page........................................................92
Engine Softkeys..................................................................92
Fuel Calculations................................................................94
3.3 EIS Display (Reversionary Mode)........................95
Engine Softkeys (Reversionary Mode)................................96
Lean Display.......................................................................97
System Display.................................................................100
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview...........................................................103
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display.......................104
Audio Panel Controls.......................................................106
4.2 COM Operation.................................................108
COM Tuning Boxes...........................................................108
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning......................................109
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz......................110
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency.....................................110
Frequency Spacing...........................................................114
Automatic Squelch...........................................................115
Volume.............................................................................116
4.3 NAV Operation..................................................117
NAV Radio Selection and Activation................................117
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...........................................117
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD...................119
Marker Beacon Receiver..................................................123
ADF/DME Tuning..............................................................124
4.4 Mode S Transponder.........................................128
Transponder Controls.......................................................128
Transponder Mode Selection............................................129
Entering a Transponder Code...........................................131
IDENT Function................................................................132
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions.....................133
Power Application............................................................133
Mono/Stereo Headsets.....................................................133
Speaker............................................................................133
Intercom...........................................................................133
Passenger Address (PA) System........................................135
Clearance Recorder and Player........................................135
Split COM.........................................................................136
Entertainment Inputs.......................................................137
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......................138
4.7 Abnormal Operation.........................................139
5.11 Abnormal Operation.........................................256
Stuck Microphone............................................................139
COM Tuning Failure..........................................................139
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.......................................139
Reversionary Mode..........................................................139
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather..............................................260
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction......................................................141
6.2 FIS-B Weather....................................................292
Activating Services..........................................................260
Using SiriusXM Weather Products....................................261
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar................................142
Using FIS-B Weather Products..........................................292
FIS-B Weather Status........................................................304
5.2 Using Map Displays...........................................144
6.3 Stormscope Lightning.......................................305
Map Orientation..............................................................144
Map Range......................................................................146
Map Panning....................................................................148
Measuring Bearing and Distance.....................................151
Topography......................................................................152
Map Symbols...................................................................154
Additional Navigation Map Items....................................162
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map...............306
Selecting the Stormscope Page........................................309
5.3 Waypoints.........................................................168
Airports............................................................................169
Intersections....................................................................176
NDBs................................................................................177
VORs................................................................................179
VRPs................................................................................181
User Waypoints................................................................182
6.4 Terrain Proximity...............................................311
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data....................................312
Terrain Proximity Page.....................................................314
6.5 Terrain-SVS........................................................316
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data.............................................317
MAP - Terrain-SVS Page...................................................319
System Status..................................................................323
6.6 TAWS-B..............................................................325
Displaying TAWS-B Data..................................................326
TAWS-B Page...................................................................329
TAWS-B Alerts..................................................................330
System Status..................................................................337
5.4 Airspaces...........................................................189
5.5 Direct-to Navigation.........................................193
5.6 Flight Planning..................................................198
6.7 Profile View Terrain...........................................339
Selection and Modification Methods...............................199
Flight Plan Display...........................................................201
Creating a Flight Plan......................................................203
Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications...............204
Flight Plan Operations.....................................................211
Managing Flight Plans.....................................................220
6.8 Traffic Information Service (TIS).......................342
5.7 Vertical Navigation...........................................228
TAS Symbology................................................................350
Traffic Alerts.....................................................................352
System Test......................................................................353
Operation.........................................................................354
Altitude Constraints.........................................................230
5.8 Procedures........................................................233
Departures.......................................................................234
Arrivals.............................................................................236
Approaches......................................................................238
5.9 Weight and Fuel................................................249
Weight and Fuel Planning................................................249
Weight Caution And Warning Conditions.........................251
5.10 Trip PlanninG.....................................................252
Trip Planning....................................................................252
xvi
Dead Reckoning...............................................................256
Profile View Display.........................................................339
Profile Path......................................................................341
Displaying TRAFFIC Data..................................................343
MAP - Traffic Map Page....................................................344
TIS Alerts..........................................................................345
System Status..................................................................347
6.9 Skywatch SKY497 Traffic Advisory System..........350
6.10 Garmin ADS-B Traffic.........................................362
ADS-B System Overview..................................................362
ADS-B with TAS................................................................363
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting........................363
Airborne and Surface Applications...................................366
Traffic Description............................................................367
Operation.........................................................................367
System Status..................................................................376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 S-TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot (Optional).............379
Flight Director Mode Annunciation..................................379
Altitude Preselect.............................................................379
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SafeTaxi.............................................................382
8.2 ChartView.........................................................385
ChartView Softkeys..........................................................386
Terminal Procedures Charts..............................................386
Day/Night View................................................................392
8.3 FliteCharts.........................................................395
FliteCharts Softkeys..........................................................396
Terminal Procedures Charts..............................................397
Chart Options...................................................................401
Day/Night View................................................................401
8.4 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment...........402
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services....................402
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio.........................................403
8.5 Flight Data Logging..........................................407
8.6 Electronic Checklists.........................................409
8.7 Abnormal Operation.........................................412
SiriusXM Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting..................412
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts..........................................415
CAS Message Prioritization..............................................416
CAS Annunciations...........................................................417
Message Advisory Alerts..................................................418
System Message Advisories.............................................419
Database Management.............................................429
Navigation Databases......................................................430
Dual Navigation Database Feature .................................432
Garmin Databases...........................................................434
Frequently Asked Questions......................................451
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
xvii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
xviii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000 Integrated Avionics System as installed in the Piper PA-32
Saratoga. This includes the PA-32R-301 (Saratoga II HP), the PA-32R-301T (Saratoga II TC), the PA-32-301FT
(Piper 6X), and the PA-32-301XTC (Piper 6XT). The G1000 system is an integrated flight control system that
presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification information to the pilot
through large-format displays. The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1040 (2) Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
• GTX 345R (1) Extended Squitter Mode A/C, S
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Transponder
• GIA 63W (2) Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU)
• GEA 71 (1) Engine/Airframe Unit
• GDC 74A (1) Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GMU 44 (1) Magnetometer
• GRS 77 (1) Attitude and Heading Reference
• GMA 1347 (1) Audio Panel with Integrated
System (AHRS)
Marker Beacon Receiver
• GDL 69A SXM (1) Satellite Data Link Receiver
• GA 55 (1) XM Antenna
A top-level system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GA 55). The system is capable
of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• L-3 SKYWATCH® Traffic Advisory System
• Honeywell® KN 63 DME Transceiver
• S-TEC System Fifty Five X® Autopilot
• Honeywell® KR 87 ADF Receiver
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather
Mapping Sensor
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040 (2) – A GDU 1040 is configured as the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and the Multifunction Flight
Display (MFD). Each unit is a 10 inch, high resolution LED backlit display. The displays communicate with
each other. Each display is also paired with the on-side Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU).
• GMA 1347 (1) – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. The GMA 1347 also provides manual
control of display Reversionary Mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP Button; see further discussion later in this section)
and communicates with both IAUs.
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs
with the on-side display (GDU). Each IAU contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a Flight
Director (FD) and system integration microprocessors. Each IAU is paired with the on-side display. The IAUs
are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
• GDC 74A (1) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT
probe. This unit provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the system, and
it communicates with both IAUs, the PFD, the MFD, and the AHRS (it also interfaces directly with the OAT
probe).
• GEA 71 (1) – The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors.
This unit communicates with both IAUs.
• GTX 345R (1) – Solid-state transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability, as well as ADS-B In/Out. The
transponder communicates with both IAUs.
• GRS 77 (1) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information to both displays and both IAUs. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers
and rate sensors) that interface with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information, with the ADC to
obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information.
• GMU 44 (1) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it.
• GDL 69A SXM (1) – The SiriusXM Datalink Receiver provides weather information, as well as digital audio
entertainment. The receiver communicates with the MFD. A subscription to SiriusXM Weather and/or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service is required to enable services.
• GA 55 (1) – A stud mount XM antenna.
INDEX
APPENDICES
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable user’s guide. This document
assumes the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
(MFD)
GDL 69A SXM
(Datalink
Receiver)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GRS 77
(Attitude & Heading
Reference System)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
(PFD)
GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
GMA 1347
(Audio
Panel)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics Unit)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics Unit)
EIS
GDC 74A
(Air Data
Computer)
GTX 345R
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
VHF COM
GEA 71
(Engine/Airframe Unit)
GPS/SBAS
S-TEC System
Fifty Five X
(Autopilot)
WX-500
Stormscope
VOR/LOC
G/S
System
Integration
Micro
processors
Garmin Equipment
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
L-3 Skywatch
(Traffic
Advisory)
AFCS
System
Integration
Microprocessors
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Transponder)
Non-Garmin Equipment
KN 63
(DME)
APPENDICES
KR 87
(ADF)
Optional
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
INDEX
Figure 1-1 Basic System Block Diagram
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: DO NOT use the database SD cards for any purpose other than database storage.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating databases.
NOTE: Ensure the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for various databases,
system software updates, recording flight data, and storing electronic documents. Not all SD cards are compatible
with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.
Installing an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages (the front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel).
To remove, gently push on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SD Card Slots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-2 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 APPLYING POWER TO THE SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: See the current pertinent flight manual for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
EIS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system annunciations should disappear
typically within the first minute of applying power. During this time, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel and the display bezels.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of applying power. The AHRS can align
itself both while taxiing in a straight line and during level flight.
When the MFD powers on, the initial screen displays the following information:
• System version
• Obstacle database name and expiration date
• Copyright
• Navigation database name and expiration date
• Land database name and version
• Terrain database name and version
• SafeTaxi database name and expiration date
• Airport Directory database name and expiration date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the MAP – NAVIGATION
MAP Page is displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of
satellites to determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-3 PFD Start-up Screen
Figure 1-4 MFD Start-up Screen
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode,
it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
The displays are connected to each other for high-speed communication. As shown in Figure 1-1, each IAU is
connected to the on-side display. Normal and reversionary system display operation, as well as the various AHRS
modes and system annunciations, are discussed here.
EIS
NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
Figure 1-5 Normal Operation
AFCS
REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In the event of a display failure, the system automatically switches to Reversionary (backup) Mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
If a display fails, the appropriate interface between that display and the associated IAU is cut off. Thus, the
IAU can no longer communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM
functions provided to the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system
reverts to backup paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change
to backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV1 and COM1 (Due to a Failed PFD)
are Flagged as Invalid
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode
Figure 1-6 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Integrated
Avionics Units
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (the following figure displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). For a detailed description of
all annunciations and alerts, refer to the Appendices. Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual
for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
When power is applied to the system, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize.
All instruments should be operational within one minute of applying power. If any instrument remains flagged,
the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
Integrated
Avionics Units
Air Data Computer
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS or
Magnetometer
Engine Airframe
Unit or
Integrated Avionics
Unit
APPENDICES
Integrated Avionics
Units
Air Data Computer
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 1-7 System Failure Annunciations
Transponder or
Integrated Avionics
Units
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the ADAHRS/AHRS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Attitude, and Heading Reference System calibration incomplete or configuration module failure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigational use. Note that ADAHRS/
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. ADAHRS/AHRS operation may be degraded
if GPS signals are not present (see pertinent flight manual).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from the Air Data Computer.
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the Air Data Computer.
APPENDICES
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from the ADAHRS/AHRS or Magnetometer.
INDEX
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the Air Data Computer.
8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Comment
Display system is not receiving valid OAT information from the Air Data Computer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
Other Various Red X
Indications
A red ‘X’ through any other display field (such as engine instrumentation fields) indicates the
field is not receiving valid data.
Table 1-1 System Failure Annunciations
EIS
AHRS OPERATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WARNING: Do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and heading indications in the following geographic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
areas (due to variations in the earth’s magnetic field): North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In addition to using internal sensors, the AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air data to assist
in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field measurements.
If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data information for
attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see following figure) and depend on the
combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated
to the pilot via message advisory alerts.
The AHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field
and its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
9
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
YES
NO
Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
Mag Data Available and Reliable?
NO
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
YES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AHRS Normal
Mode
NO
YES
Air Data Available and Reliable?
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Heading Invalid
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
Attitude/Heading Invalid
Figure 1-8 AHRS Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AHRS FAILURE
Failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors may result in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated
by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
GPS INPUT FAILURE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time, which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
APPENDICES
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS continues to operate in Reversionary No-GPS Mode, so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs
are available and reliable. Unavailable or unreliable air data or magnetometer data in addition to GPS failure
results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
INDEX
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red ‘X’).
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Failure of the air data input has no affect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
A failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in Reversionary No-GPS Mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red ‘X’s).
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
EIS
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to
ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD. When both GPS receivers are providing
accurate data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by
the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX – GPS STATUS
Page.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group (see this section for information
on navigating MFD Page Groups).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX – GPS STATUS Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-on when one GPS receiver has acquired
satellites before the other or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS signal. While the aircraft
is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty
acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers
temporarily losing the SBAS signal. If no failure message exists, check the AUX – GPS STATUS Page and
compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
GPS Selection
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
RAIM Softkey
Selected
Figure 1-9 AUX – GPS STATUS Page (RAIM or SBAS Softkey Selected)
SBAS
Softkey
Selected
The AUX – GPS STATUS Page provides the following information:
SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudorandom Noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
SATELLITE SIGNAL INFORMATION STATUS
INDEX
APPENDICES
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown on the upper right of the AUX – GPS STATUS Page. When the receiver
is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
EIS
RECEIVER AUTONOMOUS INTEGRITY MONITORING (RAIM) PREDICTION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In most cases, performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected
approach may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for
the intended approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is
not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated
by the messages ‘Approach is not active’ and ‘RAIM not available from FAF to MAP’. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction requirements. Reference
the RAIM/Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at flygarmin.com as required.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – GPS STATUS Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Push the FMS Knob. The WAYPOINT Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key
(refer to this section for instructions on entering alphanumeric data).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, or AIRWAY waypoints, if required.
EIS
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – GPS STATUS Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
AFCS
3) Push the FMS Knob. The WAYPOINT Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
INDEX
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SBAS SELECTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable SBAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS Field in the GPS
STATUS Box indicates DISABLED.
Disabling SBAS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – GPS STATUS Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
EIS
3) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘EGNOS’ or ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’, as necessary.
5) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Repeat steps 4 & 5 as necessary, then push the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-10 Enable/Disable SBAS
GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS
AFCS
The AUX – GPS STATUS Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to
poor satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength
bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for
SBAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal
bar appearance:
»» No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
»» Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
»» Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
»» Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
»» Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
»» ‘D’ indication—Denotes the satellite can be used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30 second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the
time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and Audio
Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information about Audio Panel and NAV/COM controls.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10
13
11
14
12
15
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
16
18
17
AFCS
Figure 1-11 PFD/MFD Controls
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob
-- Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)
-- Press to toggle Morse Code identifier audio on/off
2 NAV Frequency
-- Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Transfer Key
3 NAV Knob
16
-- Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
-- Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
4 Heading Knob
-- Turn to manually select a heading
-- Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the Horizontal Situation Indicator
(HSI) and synchronize the Selected Heading to the and current heading
5 Joystick
-- Turn to change map range
-- Press to activate Map Pointer and move in desired direction to pan map
6 CRS/BARO Knob
-- Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
-- Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
-- Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
8 COM Frequency
-- Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
-- Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
the active frequency field
Transfer Key
(EMERG)
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob
10 Direct-to Key (
)
-- Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency Box)
-- Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on/off
12 CLR Key
-- Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
-- Press and hold to display the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page (MFD only)
-- Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes
14 PROC Key
-- Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
15 ENT Key
-- Validates/confirms selection or data entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
13 MENU Key
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
-- Displays flight plan information
EIS
-- Activates the Direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and
establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route)
11 FPL Key
(DFLT MAP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
-- Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
-- Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2
-- The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7 COM Knob
16 FMS Knob (Flight
-- Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
-- Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the thousands,
the small knob selects the hundreds)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Keys
18 ALT Knob
AFCS
17 Softkey Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
-- Press to turn the selection cursor on/off
Management System -- Data Entry: With cursor on, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
Knob)
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location)
-- Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window or box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view; with cursor on, turn large knob to scroll through the list
-- Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having a small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
APPENDICES
Large (Outer)
Knob
Small (Inner)
Knob
INDEX
Figure 1-12 Dual Concentric Knob
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is pressed, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
Softkey
On
Softkey Names
EIS
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Figure 1-13 Softkeys (Top-level PFD Configuration)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, and NRST softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on gray
background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be pressed to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
Softkeys are listed in the following table in order by row for each level as they appear on the screen left to
right.
Level 1
Level 2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
INSET
AFCS
OFF
DCLTR (3)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WX LGND
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC
TOPO
INDEX
TERRAIN
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
18
Level 3
Description
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter
levels:
-- DCLTR: (no declutter) All map features visible
-- DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
-- DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
-- DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays icon and age on the Inset Map for the selected weather
products (optional)
Displays traffic information on Inset Map
-- TRAFFIC: No traffic displayed on Inset Map
-- TRFC-1: Declutters traffic displayed on Inset Map
-- TRFC-2: A traffic only display is shown
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes)
and elevation scale on Inset Map
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map
(optional)
Displays XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
PFD
OFF
360 HSI
ARC HSI
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
METERS
IN
HPA
APPENDICES
ALT UNIT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
BRG2
Wind information not displayed
Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:
-- NAV1 – NAV 1 waypoint frequency or identifier and GPSderived distance
-- GPS – GPS waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance
-- ADF – ADF (optional)
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information windows
unavailable)
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:
-- NAV2 – NAV 2 waypoint frequency or identifier and GPSderived distance
-- GPS – GPS waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance
-- ADF – ADF
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO settings to
metric units
Displays Altimeter in meters
Displays the BARO setting as inches of mercury
Displays the BARO setting as hectopascals
AFCS
HSI FRMT
Total direction with headwind and crosswind speed components
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DME
BRG1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OPTN 3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIND
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision
features (optional)
PATHWAY Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical
flight path of the active flight plan
SYN TERR Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch Line
HRZN
HDG
APTSIGNS Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm
of the current aircraft position; airport identifiers are displayed
when the airport is within approximately 9 nm
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to
standard
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
OPTN 1 Longitudinal and lateral components
OPTN 2 Total direction and speed
EIS
DFLTS
Description
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYN VIS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
STD BARO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
EIS
STBY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ON
ALT
VFR
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CODE
0—7
IDENT
Use numbers to enter code
BKSP
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18
seconds, identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18
seconds, identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
IDENT
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18
seconds, identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen
IDENT
Displays REFERENCES Window
TMR/REF
Displays NEAREST AIRPORTS Window
NRST
AFCS
Description
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if HPA Softkey
is selected)
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only
available with active leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the CDI
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing selection of the DME
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
Selects standby mode (transponder does not reply to any
interrogations)
Selects Mode A (transponder replies to interrogations)
Selects Mode C altitude reporting mode (transponder replies to
identification and altitude interrogations)
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the USA only)
Table 1-2 PFD Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD SOFTKEYS IN REVERSIONARY MODE
APPENDICES
In the event of a display failure, the system automatically switches to Reversionary Mode. The following
table indicates PFD softkey data that displays differently in Reversionary Mode. All other critical flight data
displays are in the same format as normal operating mode and are discussed in other parts of this section.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
ENGINE
LEAN
INDEX
CYL SLCT
20
Description
Displays the LEAN and SYSTEM Softkeys
Displays the CYL SLCT Softkey to facilitate engine leaning
Cycles through selection of each cylinder indicated by changing the
cylinder display to cyan
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
SYSTEM
Description
Displays the DEC FUEL, INC FUEL, and RES FUEL
softkeys
Decreases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
Increases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
Resets fuel used to zero and gallons remaining to full
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Table 1-3 PFD Softkeys – Reversionay Mode
EIS
MFD SOFTKEYS
Level 1
Level 2
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
MAP
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO
XM LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Navigation
Map (optional)
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map (optional)
APPENDICES
NEXRAD
Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on Navigation Map
Displays terrain information on Navigation Map
Cycles through choices of airway information
-- AIRWY ON ­– Displays all airways
-- AIRWY LO ­– Displays low altitude airways only
-- AIRWY HI ­– Displays high altitude airways only
Displays/removes Stormscope data on Navigation Map (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STRMSCP
Resets fuel used to zero and gallons remaining to full
Enables second-level Navigation Map softkeys
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map
AFCS
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
Displays the DEC FUEL, INC FUEL, and RST FUEL softkeys
available
Decreases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
Increases gallons remaining by one gallon for each press
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
RST FUEL
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENGINE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD softkeys allow controlling and viewing of many functions, including engine instruments, fuel
system data, GPS, communication, navigation, flight planning, terrain, traffic, and weather. Each softkey
sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is
visible at all softkey levels. The label changes if messages are issued. MFD softkeys vary depending on the
page selected. MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page (default MFD page) softkeys are described here.
Displays/removes graphical METARs on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays/removes METAR legend on Navigation Map (optional)
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DCLTR (3)
SHW
CHRT
Level 2
Description
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
-- DCLTR: (no declutter) All map features visible
-- DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
-- DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
-- DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedures charts
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Table 1-4 MFD Softkeys – MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page
22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.7 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the
MENU Key while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.
EIS
The system has a dedicated MENU Key, that when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window or page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window or page selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window or box when the option list is longer than the window or box).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or push the FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
No Options for Selected
Window/Page
Options for FPL Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-14 PAGE MENU Examples
APPENDICES
DATA ENTRY
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
The FMS Knob can be used for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers,
barometric minimum descent altitude) into the system. In some instances, such as when entering an identifier,
the system will try to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the
desired identifier appears, press the ENT Key to confirm the entry without entering the rest of the identifier
manually. This can save the pilot from having to enter all the characters of the identifier.
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, turning the small FMS Knob accesses three
different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: flight plan (FPL), nearest (NRST), and recently-entered
(RECENT). The system automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the
selected waypoint.
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
EIS
3) Begin entering data by turning the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
Turning the knob to the right scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, followed by
the digits zero through nine. Turning the knob to the left scrolls through the characters in the opposite order.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
5) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
7) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).
PAGE GROUPS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
AFCS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs.
The current page group, and current page within the group, are shown in cyan. For some of these pages, the
active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.
Page Group
Active Page Title
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pages in
Current
Group
Page Groups
Figure 1-15 Page Title and Page Groups
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
Page Group
MAP
Pages within Page Group
• Navigation Map
• Traffic Map
• Stormscope (optional)
WPT (Waypoint)
• Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
-- Airport Information (INFO-1 Softkey)
-- Airport Directory Information (INFO-2
Softkey)
-- Departure Information (DP Softkey)
-- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
-- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
-- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
•
•
•
•
•
AUX (Auxiliary)
•
•
•
•
•
• XM Pages (optional)
-- XM Information (Info Softkey)
-- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
• System Status
FPL (Flight Plan)
• Active Flight Plan
-- Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
NRST (Nearest)
• Nearest Airports
• Nearest Intersections
• Nearest NDB
• Weather Data Link (optional)
• Terrain
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Information
NDB Information
VOR Information
VRP Information
User Waypoint Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Trip Planning
Weight and Fuel Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
EIS
There are also several pages (e.g., Airport Information pages) which are selected first from within a main page
group with the FMS Knobs, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In this case, the page
remains set to the selected screen until a different screen softkey is pressed.
• Nearest Frequencies
• Nearest Airspaces
APPENDICES
• Nearest VOR
• Nearest VRP
• Nearest User WPTS
Table 1-5 Page Groups and Pages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Flight Plan Catalog
-- Stored Flight Plan (via New Softkey)
The procedure loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate procedure loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the active and stored flight plan pages. Turning the FMS Knob
does not scroll through the procedure loading pages.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETUP AND STATUS PAGES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup and System Status. The AUX
– SYSTEM SETUP Page allows management of various system parameters, while the AUX – SYSTEM STATUS
Page displays the status of all system LRUs.
AUX – SYSTEM SETUP PAGE
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page allows management of the following system parameters:
»» Pilot Profile Status
»» Audio Alert
»» Time Format (LOCAL or UTC )
»» MFD Navigation Data Bar Fields (see Flight
»» Displayed Measurement Units
Management Section)
»» Barometric Transition Alert (see Flight
»» GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range
Instruments Section)
(see Flight Instruments Section)
»» Airspace Alerts (see Flight Management
»» COM transceiver channel spacing (see Audio
Section)
Panel and CNS Section)
»» Arrival Alert (see Flight Management
»» Displayed nearest airports (see Flight
Section)
Management Section)
INDEX
Figure 1-16 AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pilot Profiles
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. Each time the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD Start-up Screen. The system can store up to 25 profiles. The currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of the
AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page in the box labeled PILOT PROFILE. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-17 Pilot Profile Settings on AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
AFCS
Creating a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the PILOT PROFILE Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A CREATE PROFILE Window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
APPENDICES
6) In the next field, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE & ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
EIS
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ACTIVE Field in the PILOT PROFILE Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the PILOT PROFILE Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) In the RENAME PROFILE Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
9) To cancel the process, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the PILOT PROFILE Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) In the DELETE PROFILE Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
If an SD card is inserted in the top slot of the MFD, pilot profiles may imported from the SD card to the
system, or exported from the system to the SD card.
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Because system settings may vary from one airframe to another, always verify system settings from an
imported profile are consistent with the desired settings.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
3) Press the IMPORT Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) The system displays the PILOT PROFILE IMPORTING Window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
PROFILE NAME Field, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) If desired, the profile name to be used after a profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the profile file name, then use the FMS Knob to enter the new desired name and press
the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.
6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
PILOT PROFILE IMPORTING Window.
8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS Window. With ‘OK’
highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or push the FMS Knob to return to the AUX – System Setup Page. The
imported profile becomes the active profile.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)
APPENDICES
PILOT PROFILE IMPORTING and IMPORT
RESULTS Windows
Import Successful
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 1-18 Pilot Profile Import on AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the pilot profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active pilot profile can be exported.
4) Press the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the PILOT PROFILE EXPORTING Window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) To export the pilot profile using the existing name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To change
the profile file name, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SELECT FILE Field, enter the new name with the
large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card with
the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
PILOT PROFILE EXPORTING Window without exporting the profile.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS Window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or push the FMS Knob to return to the AUX – System Setup Page.
PILOT PROFILE EXPORTING Window; Select
Profile to Export
Export Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-19 Pilot Profile Export on AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
Date/Time
INDEX
APPENDICES
The system obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX – GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner
of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: LOCAL 12hr, LOCAL 24hr, or UTC. Local time is set by
adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-20 System Time (LOCAL 24hr Format)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Configuring the system time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TIME FORMAT Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The TIME
OFFSET Field is highlighted.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-21 Date/Time Settings on AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Display Units
Category
Navigation Angle
Settings
Magnetic*
True
Distance and Speed
Metric
Nautical*
Altitude and Vertical
Speed
Feet*
Meters
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit*
Gallons*
Imperial Gallons
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds
Pounds*
All Temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel Parameters (Trip Planning Page)
N/A
N/A
HDDD°MM.MM’*
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
All Positions
N/A
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Measurements which have multiple display unit options are listed on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page in the
DISPLAY UNITS Box. The desired units can be set from here, as outlined in the following table.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
APPENDICES
Weight***
Position**
Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind Direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack Error (HSI)
Bearing Distances (Bearing Information
Windows)
DME Distance (DME Information Window)
Flight Plan Distance
Map Ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK Fields
All Distances on MFD
Altitude Buffer Distance (System Setup Page)
Arrival Alert Trigger Distance (System Setup
Page)
All Speeds on MFD
All Altitudes on MFD
All Elevations on MFD
Exceptions
N/A
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind Speed Vector
Map Range (Traffic and Terrain
Pages)
CDI Scaling (System Setup Page)
Fuel Range Calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV Altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
INDEX
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
*** Not configurable
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings on AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing a display unit setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the DISPLAY UNITS Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
5) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
Audio Alerts
EIS
The AUDIO ALERT Box on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male
or female.
Changing the audio alert voice:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the AUDIO ALERT Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice.
5) Press the ENT Key.
GPS CDI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GPS CDI Box on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page allows the pilot to define the scale for the Course
Deviation Indicator (CDI) when GPS is the selected navigation source and also displays the current system
value for the CDI scale. The range values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side. The
default setting is ‘AUTO’ (refer to the CDI description in the Flight Instruments Section for information on
CDI scaling).
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.00NM or 0.30NM), the higher scale settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. Note the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits
follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phase.
AFCS
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘SELECTED’ in the GPS CDI Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting (2.00NM, 1.00NM, 0.30NM, AUTO) and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
COM Configuration
The COM CONFIG Box on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0
kHz COM frequency channel spacing.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing COM channel spacing:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the CHANNEL SPACING Field in the COM CONFIG Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.
Airspace Alerts
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Refer to the Flight Management Section of this manual for further discussion.
Arrival Alerts
Refer to the Flight Management Section of this manual for further discussion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Director Format
Not pilot configurable.
MFD Data Bar Fields
Refer to the Flight Management Section of this manual for further discussion.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Nearest Airports
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Refer to the Flight Management Section of this manual for further discussion.
34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUX – SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AUX – SYSTEM STATUS Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system
LRUs. Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green
check marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or
Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-22 AUX – SYSTEM STATUS Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the AUX – SYSTEM STATUS Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO
Box or AIRFRAME Box) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information.
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the MFD1 DATABASE Box. Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the
MFD. Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is
now displayed in the PFD1 DATABASE Box.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
APPENDICES
SYSTEM UTILITIES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX –
UTILITY Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and
a record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum
groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset.
35
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-23 AUX – UTILITY Page
TIMERS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero, the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the TIMER Field (00:00:00).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM:SS) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With the UP/DN Field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and
press the ENT Key.
5) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
APPENDICES
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
INDEX
8) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 1-24 Generic Timer on PFD REFERENCES Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the generic timer (AUX – UTILITY Page):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – UTILITY Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a starting time is desired:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the 00:00:00 Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM:SS) and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
AFCS
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 1-25 Timers on AUX – UTILITY Page
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-on or from the time the aircraft
lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – UTILITY Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the FLIGHT Field in the TIMERS Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – UTILITY Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-on or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – UTILITY Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the DEPARTURE TIME Field in the TIMERS Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SCHEDULER
APPENDICES
The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”, “Switch
fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”). Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the
message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches
zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once
the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and the message timer
countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
INDEX
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – Utility Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty MESSAGE Field in the SCHEDULER Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the ALERTS Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the TYPE Field
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One Time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key again or turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the TIME Field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YY) in the DATE Field and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the TIME Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – Utility Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the MESSAGE Field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
Scheduler messages appear in the ALERTS Window on the PFD and cause the ALERTS Softkey label to
change to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the ALERTS Window and acknowledges the
scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘ALERTS’ label, and when pressed, the ALERTS Window is
removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-26 PFD ALERTS Window
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
Refer to the Flight Management Section of this manual for further discussion.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT DATA LOGGER
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Refer to the Additional Features Section of this manual for further discussion.
40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically
or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses photocell technology to automatically
adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display
appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can be
accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures. In normal operating
mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from the
remaining display.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD SETUP MENU Window. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD
DSPL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With the intensity value now highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ in the MFD DSPL Field and repeat steps 2-4.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD SETUP MENU Window. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD
DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
6) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) With the intensity value now highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
APPENDICES
10) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
11) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
41
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-27 PFD SETUP MENU Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PFD
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
-- Turn Rate Indicator
-- Bearing Pointers and Information Windows
-- Navigation Source
-- Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
-- DME Information Window
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
• Timer/References Window, showing
-- Generic Timer
-- Vspeed Values
-- Barometric Minimum Altitude
• Wind Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
-- Indicated Airspeed
-- Trend Vector
-- Airspeed Awareness Ranges
-- Vspeed Reference Bugs
-- True Airspeed
• Attitude Indicator with Slip/Skid Indication
• Altimeter, showing
-- Trend Vector
-- Barometric Setting
-- Selected Altitude
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications
EIS
The system provides increased situational awareness by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with
an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) featuring a large horizon, along with airspeed, attitude, altitude,
vertical speed, and course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication,
terrain, traffic, and weather information also appear on the PFD and are explained in other sections of this Pilot’s
Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations discussed throughout this Pilot’s Guide.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
20
19
18
1
17
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16
15
2
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
13
3
12
4
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
10
7
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
11
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
12
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
13
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
14
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Heading Bug
15
Altimeter
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
16
Selected Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
17
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
18
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
19
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
20
Attitude Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
44
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
10
9
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
5
6
FLIGHT PLAN Window
2
Wind Data
7
Selected Course
3
Inset Map
8
Vertical Deviation Indicator
4
Bearing Information Windows
9
Marker Beacon Annunciation
5
Barometric Minimum Descent
Altitude
10
VNV Target Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Heading
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for airframe-specific airspeed criteria and
Vspeed values.
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed (TAS)
is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching maximum operating
speed (VNE), at which point appears red.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Operating Ranges
Low Speed Range
Red Pointer at VNE
Airspeed Trend Vector
Speed Ranges
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vspeed Reference Bug
True Airspeed
AFCS
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is amber, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. A white stripe indicates the flaps operating range.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line, extending up or down the airspeed scale to the right of
the speed range. The end of the trend vector indicates the predicted airspeed in six seconds if the current rate of
acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the number in the indicated airspeed pointer changes
to amber. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is
not available due to a system failure.
Vspeeds (Glide, Vx, Vy, and Vr) can be changed and their bugs turned on/off from the Timer/References
Window. When active (ON), the Vspeeds are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale. On the next avionics
power cycle, Vspeeds return to their default values. When the indicated airspeed is below 20 knots, enabled
Vspeed bugs and their numeric values appear in a list at the bottom of the airspeed tape, ordered from highest
to lowest.
46
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field of the desired Vspeed to be changed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value. When a speed has been changed from a default value, an
asterisk appears next to the speed.
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ‘ON’ or counterclockwise to ‘OFF’.
EIS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Timer/References Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Timer/References Window
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menu
Turning all Vspeed bugs on/off:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) To activate all Vspeed bugs, press the ENT Key with ‘All References On’ highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed bugs, turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References Off’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening five degree increments,
up to 25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch
marks occur every 2.5˚.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional Inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
48
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays barometric altitude values on a moving tape rolling number gauge in feet or meters
with the Indicated Altitude displayed in the black pointer, The barometric pressure setting is displayed in a
box below the Altimeter, and the pilot can choose the unit of pressure (inches or hectopascals). The Selected
Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. When the metric
value is selected, it is displayed in a separate overlay box above the Selected Altitude. A magenta Altitude
Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, with the end resting at the approximate altitude
to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if altitude remains
constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure. Additionally, the Altitude
Bug is displayed when nearing approach minimums.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SELECTED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A
bug corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on
the tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape.
The ALT Knob has a stop-altitude feature that is related to vertical navigation altitudes in the flight plan.
While turning the ALT Knob, the Selected Altitude can stop at intermediate values corresponding to vertical
navigation altitudes. Stop-altitudes include the approach minimum altitude and valid VNAV constraints that
include manually entered and published constraints, excluding published approach step down altitudes.
When temperature compensation is applied to a stop-altitude waypoint, the Selected Altitude will stop at
the temperature corrected altitude. Refer to the Flight Management Section for a discussion on both VNAV
Constraints and Temperature Compensation and see the AFCS Section for more information about the
Selected Altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Setting the Selected Altitude:
AFCS
Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments; small knob for 100-ft
increments). When the unit overlay function is enabled, the Selected Altitude will stop at both the standard
increments and the metric increments.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If a Minimum Altitude value has been set, this altitude is also available for the Selected Altitude while
turning the ALT Knob.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Current
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Minimum
Altitude
Bug
Current
Altitude
(Meters)
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Altimeter Setting (in Hg)
Altimeter Setting (Metric)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, English and Metric
UNITS AND UNIT OVERLAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot can choose to display overlays for the Indicated Altitude and Selected Altitude using alternate
display units without changing the scale of the Altimeter. For example, if the Altimeter is displaying feet,
the system can show a metric overlay for the indicated and selected altitudes without changing the scale or
display units of the Altimeter.
Displaying the metric altitude overlays:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
AFCS
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to enable/disable metric altitude overlays.
4) Press the BACK Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
BAROMETRIC SETTING
INDEX
APPENDICES
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg), or
hectopascals (hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates
discontinuities in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take
several minutes for the aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a
waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet
the vertical constraint.
50
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
EIS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg), or press the HPA
Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the BACK Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
The Barometric Transition Alert flashes the altimeter setting. This alert occurs when the aircraft is within
200 feet of the barometric transition altitude and the altimeter setting has not been changed to/from standard,
as applicable. The flashing alert stops when the pilot changes the altimeter setting.
AFCS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page on the MFD.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ selection in the BARO TRANSITION ALERT Box.
4) If needed, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ to enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ALTITUDE Field in the BARO TRANSITION ALERT Box.
APPENDICES
6) Use the FMS Knobs to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
7) To cancel the selection, push the FMS Knob.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
51
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert
on AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 1000 and
2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
AFCS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available when an SBAS signal (such as WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS) is
available.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical deviation when
Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the ‘TOD within 1 minute’ alert.
The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management Section
for details on VNV features, and refer to Supplemental Flight Data later in this section, for more information
about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active
NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107˚. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope
Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no
glideslope, ‘NO GS’ appears instead of the green diamond.
52
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V). When a GPS approach with one of these service levels is loaded into
the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation source, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond
during the approach. Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits. If the approach
downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), ‘NO GP’ is displayed in place of the diamond.
Marker Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
EIS
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glipepath
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Glideslope Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed and Deviation
Indicators (VSI and VDI)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glideslope
Vertical Indicator
Speed
Pointer
Glidepath Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and Vertical Deviation Indications
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
AFCS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at 5˚degree intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and
the current track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course
deviation, bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats: a 360˚ compass
rose and a 140˚ arc.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Press the PFD Softkey
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
4) Press the BACK Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, sliding
Deviation Bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line
arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with the
Course Pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
15
14
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
12
2
11
EIS
3
4
10
5
9
6
9
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
To/From Indicator
11
Course Pointer
4
Navigation Source
12
Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
15
8
OBS Mode Active
Turn Rate and Heading Trend
Vector
14 Current Heading
Lubber Line
Figure 2-11 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the
To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. The Course
Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2), depending on
the navigation source, and points in the direction of the set course.
APPENDICES
Course Pointer
Track Indicator
Navigation
Source
Flight Phase
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Course
Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
Figure 2-12 Arc HSI
INDEX
The selected heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for three seconds after being adjusted. The cyan
heading bug on the compass rose corresponds to the selected heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if
the heading bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
54
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting the selected heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the selected heading.
Push the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for three seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown. The color of the Selected Course corresponds to the selected navigation source: magenta for
GPS or green for NAV (VOR, LOC).
Adjusting the Selected Course:
EIS
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Push the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the Course Pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Heading
Heading Bug
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-13 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are set on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page and are either
corrected to the computed magnetic variation (MAG VAR) or referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’). When an
approach referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change
the NAV ANGLE setting to TRUE at the appropriate time.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-14 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page on the MFD.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NAV ANGLE Field in the DISPLAY UNITS Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
• TRUE – References angles to true north (denoted with ‘T’)
• MAGNETIC – Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (MAG VAR)
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
55
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-15 AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page, Navigation Angle
Settings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TURN RATE INDICATOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and
right of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector
shows the current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based
on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the
standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates
greater than four deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is
no longer valid.
Half-standard
Turn Rate
AFCS
Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-16 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the bearing information windows and pointers are disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources
by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG or DME Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are single-line
(BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window(s) to indicate the
navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a
white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
56
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Tuning Mode
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance to
Bearing Source
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance
Station
Identifier
EIS
Bearing Source
Pointer 1
Pointer 2
Bearing 2 Information Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing Source
Figure 2-17 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information
»» Bearing Source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
»» Pointer Icon (BRG1 = Single Line, BRG2 =
Double Line)
»» Frequency (NAV, ADF)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The bearing
information windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
»» Station/Waypoint Identifier (NAV, GPS)
»» GPS-derived Great Circle Distance to Bearing
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency, the bearing source and bearing pointer are removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and ‘NO DATA’ is displayed in the information window if the
NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press either the BRG1 Softkey or BRG2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG1 Softkey or BRG2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
APPENDICES
4) Press the BRG1 Softkey or BRG2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to ADF.
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by ‘– . – – NM’. Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DME.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the Course Pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
360º HSI
Arc HSI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
AFCS
Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deviation
Bar
Crosstrack
Error
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI
Scale
Figure 2-18 Course Deviation Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when navigating GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
58
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-19 Navigation Sources
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AFCS
GPS
Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-20 Selecting a Navigation Source
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
-- A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
-- The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
-- A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
-- The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to the
FAF (see the following figure), it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
switches from GPS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fix Prior to the FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Glideslope Intercept Point
Figure 2-21 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
GPS CDI SCALING
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page and the
full-scale deflection setting may also be changed (2.00NM, 1.00NM, 0.30NM or AUTO) from this page. If
the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page on the MFD.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SELECTED in the GPS CDI Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) To cancel the selection, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
60
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-22 GPS CDI Setting on AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Missed
Approach
AFCS
Departure
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI Full-scale Deflection
When set to AUTO (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (see the following figure and table).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-23 Automatic CDI Scaling
APPENDICES
»» Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
»» The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
ƒƒ The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway.
ƒƒ The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (refer
to the Aviation Terms and Acronyms in the Appendices Section for leg type definitions).
ƒƒ After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2 nm
FAF
Landing
Threshold
AFCS
FAF
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
angle based
on database
information
course width
2 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
»» At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
ƒƒ When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
»» If after completing the departure procedure, the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0 nm).
»» Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
ƒƒ Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
»» During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see following figures). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
ƒƒ If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
ƒƒ If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-24 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, and LP+V
Approach CDI Scaling
INDEX
APPENDICES
»» When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
»» The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
ƒƒ The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path.
ƒƒ The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF.
ƒƒ After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA.
62
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see previous figures)
LNAV + V
EIS
L/VNAV
LP
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width,
then 0.3 nm, depending on variables (see previous
figures)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LP+V
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach
(Non-precision with
advisory vertical
guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LP)
Approach
(LP with advisory
vertical guidance)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
LPV
MAPR
0.3 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the
color changes to amber.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
OBS MODE
AFCS
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS
Selected
EIS
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables OBS
Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-26 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Push the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol in place of ‘OBS’ and the
OBS Softkey label changes to SUSP. Pressing the SUSP Softkey resumes automatic sequencing of approach
waypoints.
APPENDICES
Pressing the SUSP
Softkey Suspends
Waypoint Sequencing
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 2-27 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
64
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric altimeter overlay, the Inset Map and wind data display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) (default) or Fahrenheit (°F), as selected by the pilot, in the lower left
corner of the PFD under normal conditions, or below the true airspeed in Reversionary Display Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-28 Temperature Displays
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed (in knots) can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays ‘NO WIND DATA’. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
Option 3
No Data
AFCS
Option 2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Option 1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-29 Wind Data
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data to the left of HSI.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrows with headwind and crosswind components
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• OPTN 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind (H) or tailwind (T) and crosswind (X) components
EIS
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
5) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on
the PFD in conjunction with the ‘TOD within 1 minute’ message and “vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD according to the
criteria listed in the following table.
Top of Descent Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target
Altitude
AFCS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is the
Selected
Navigation
Source
Phase of
Flight
INDEX
Figure 2-30 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
66
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD and not on a descent leg
X
X
X
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
X
Last altitude-constrained waypoint in active flight plan reached
X
X
(30 sec before)
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
Criteria
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 GARMIN SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT) (OPTIONAL)
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the system. SVT depicts a forwardlooking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The Field of View is 30 degrees
to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), or on the
Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude,
heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant
features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are stored in
squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required
data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled until the required data is restored.
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south, east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow
shading on the PFD. They may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on which to base decisions and plan maneuvers
to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated solely upon the use of the terrain or obstacle data
displayed by the SVT.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
68
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-31 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Selecting the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including Synthetic Vision. Selecting the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey
is activated (gray background with black text). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG,
APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When
system power is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and
PATHWAY softkeys is remembered by the system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activating and deactivating SVT:
APPENDICES
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
INDEX
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey, if not already selected.
4) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey, if not already selected.
4) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The Horizon Heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
EIS
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey, if not already selected.
4) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of Airport Signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SVT FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport
Runway
Pathways
(Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source)
Zero Pitch
Line (ZPL)
with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AFCS
Flight Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Synthetic
Terrain
SVT Softkeys
INDEX
Figure 2-32 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the Altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
70
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PATHWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
Pathways Boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the Selected Altitude or the VNV Altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes, corresponding to a white
line drawn on the Inset Map or MFD Map indicating an inactive leg.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Programmed
Altitudes
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-33 Programmed and Selected Altitude
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and some LNAV
approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used independent
of the CDI, VDI, Glidepath Indicator, and Glideslope Indicator. They are removed from the display when
the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when
leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to
intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Departure and Enroute
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, Pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying Pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
Field of View, Pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the highest of either the Selected Altitude or the
programmed altitude for the leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with
aircraft performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by Pathways displayed at a level above
the aircraft at the altitude selected or programmed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Descent and Approach
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent. When the flight plan includes
programmed descent segments, Pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the Selected
Altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
During a Vectors-to-Final (VTF) approach transition, Pathways are displayed along the final approach
course inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP). Pathways are shown level at the Selected Altitude
or at the next programmed crossing altitude, whichever is higher, up to the point along the final approach
course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From
the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept point, the Pathways are shown inbound to the
Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral and vertical descent path.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, Pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses, are not displayed.
72
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
EIS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-34 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Missed Approach
AFCS
Upon activating the missed approach, Pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the Selected Altitude, whichever
is the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the Pathways Boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, Pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the Pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the Field of View and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways Boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FAF
Descent displayed
by pathway
EIS
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAHP
Figure 2-35 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
AFCS
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude, the FPM is aligned inside the
Pathway Boxes as shown in the following figure.
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or obstacle
avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
74
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Path
Marker (FPM)
EIS
Pathway
Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-36 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
HORIZON HEADING
AFCS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30 degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by selecting the HRZN HDG Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset Map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance Section.
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRPORT SIGNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from an
airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport Signs are shown without the identifier until the
aircraft is approximately 8 nm from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the airspeed or altitude
display. Airport Signs are activated and deactivated by selecting the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 2-37 Airport Signs
AFCS
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
INDEX
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
76
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other
Runway on
Airport
Runway
Selected for
Approach
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-38 Airport Runways
TERRAIN-SVT ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow ‘X’ symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT Field of View to the left or right of the aircraft.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain
Caution
Figure 2-39 Terrain Alert
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols
found on the Inset Map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with
relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset Map and MFD moving map
display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the
aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000
feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
78
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Obstacle
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
Warning
Potential
Impact
Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-40 SVT Obstacle
FIELD OF VIEW
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD Field of View can be represented on the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page. Two dashed lines, forming
a V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring Field of View:
1) While viewing the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
79
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Field of
View
MAP SETUP Menu, Map Group, FIELD OF VIEW Option
MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page
OPTIONS Menu
Figure 2-41 Option Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Map’ in the GROUP Box and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group fields to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD Plan View and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
APPENDICES
Lines
Depict PFD
Field of
View
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
INDEX
Figure 2-42 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
80
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
The following annunciations and alerting functions pertaining to flight instruments are displayed on the PFD.
Refer to the Appendices Section for more information on alerts and annunciations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-43 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
Deviation of ±200 ft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Within 200 ft
AFCS
Within 1000 ft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual and aural alert when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is independent of
the installed AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
-- Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a cyan background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
-- When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to cyan text
on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
-- After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an
aural tone is generated.
Figure 2-44 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. If the aircraft has the TerrainSVT feature, the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation is not applicable unless these features are inhibited, have failed, or
are unavailable.
EIS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS approach using SBAS vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top left of the Selected Altitude,
flashes for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOW ALT
Annunciation
Figure 2-45 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MINIMUM ALTITUDE ALERTING
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For altitude awareness, a minimum altitude can be set in the REFERENCES Window. This can be based
on barometric altitude or temperature compensated barometric altitude. When active, the altitude setting is
displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears
at the reference altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the
selected minimum altitude:
-- When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the minimum altitude, a box labeled ‘BARO MIN’
or ‘COMP MIN’ (based on the Selected Altitude source) appears with the altitude in cyan text (or magenta
for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at the
corresponding altitude once in range.
-- When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the Selected Altitude, the bug and text become white.
-- Once the aircraft reaches the Selected Altitude, the bug and text appear amber and the voice alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
82
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Within 100 ft
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Within 2500 ft
Altitude Reached
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
EIS
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-46 Barometric Minimum Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the minimum altitude, once it reaches 50 feet
above the minimum altitude, alerting is disabled. The function is reset when a different approach is loaded, the
approach is deleted, or when the system power is cycled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the MINIMUMS Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired altitude source: barometric (BARO) or temperature compensated
barometric (TEMP COMP). OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the next field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from 0 to 16,000 feet).
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-47 BARO and TEMP COMP Minimum Altitude
APPENDICES
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD, or
the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window on the MFD. There is only one compensation temperature
for the system. Therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and
the minimums. Refer to the Flight Management Section for information about applying temperature
compensation to approach altitudes.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in the table can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur. Refer to
the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
EIS
INTEG OK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring — GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK — GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning — System is using projected position rather than GPS
Upper right of
position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
aircraft symbol
waypoints
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-48 Example HSI Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
-- Current Track Bug
-- Wind Data (calculated based on GPS information)
-- Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
-- GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode.
APPENDICES
HEADING FAILURE MODES
INDEX
NOTE: When heading information is unavailable, the system removes the bearing pointers from the HSI, and
removes wind data from the PFD and navigation maps.
84
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the system is unable to determine the aircraft heading, but GPS-based track information is available,
the HSI displays the ground track instead of heading using HSI Track Mode. In this mode, a magenta ‘TRK’
annunciation and track display appear on the HSI. In addition, an amber ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red ‘X’
appear above the ‘TRK’ annunciation to indicate the HSI is displaying track instead of heading.
If both the heading and track are unavailable, the HSI displays an amber ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red ‘X’
over the heading display box. The system also removes directional numbers and letters from the HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Track Mode (Heading Unavailable, Track Available)
Heading and Track Unavailable
Figure 2-49 Heading Failure Displays on the HSI
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
-- 4.9 Arc-second Terrain Data
-- Obstacle Data
-- TAWS Function not Available,
in Test Mode, or Failed
-- Position of the Aircraft Exceeds
the Range of the Terrain
Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
-- Attitude Data
-- Heading Data
-- GPS Position Data
AFCS
SVT IN REVERSIONARY MODE
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when
switching to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT
PFD display, will be shown in the interim.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
APPENDICES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Nose Low
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nose High
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-50 Pitch Attitude Warnings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
-- True Airspeed
-- Ground Speed
-- Traffic Annunciations
-- Inset Map
-- Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
-- ISA Temperature Deviation
-- Wind Data
-- Selected Heading Display
-- Selected Course Display
-- Transponder Status Box
-- System Time
-- PFD Setup Menu
-- Windows Displayed in the
Lower Right Corner of the PFD:
»» Timer/References
»» Nearest Airports
»» Flight Plan
»» System Messages
»» Procedures
-- Minimum Altitude Displays
-- Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
-- Altimeter Barometric Setting
-- Selected Altitude
-- VNV Target Altitude
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
INDEX
APPENDICES
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom
of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great
enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme
pitch attitudes.
86
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Blue Band
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-51 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
87
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Blank Page
88
Garmin G100 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The gauge values shown in this section are taken from an example configuration. Refer to the
current version of the pertinent flight manual for specific values and operating limitations.
The system offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically monitoring critical
system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight. The Engine Indication System (EIS)
displays electrical, fuel, and engine information on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD). The EIS ENGINE page can be viewed by pressing the ENGINE Softkey.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-1 MFD (Normally Aspirated)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding displays flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red“X” is displayed
across the instrument.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
6
AFCS
7
8
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10
11
12
Turbocharged
Normally-aspirated
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-2 EIS (Engine) Display
90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3
Fuel Quantity
Displays left (L) and right (R) fuel quantity in gallons (GAL).
4
Fuel Flow
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (GPH).
5
Oil Temperature
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
6
Oil Pressure
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (PSI).
7
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Displays Exhaust Gas Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
8
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Displays Turbine Inlet Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
9
Cylinder Head Temperature
Displays Cylinder Head Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
10
Emergency Battery Voltage
Displays the emergency battery current in voltage (V).
11
Essential Buss Voltage
Displays the essential bus current in voltage (V).
12
Main Alternator Current
Standby Alternator Current
Displays main alternator current in amperes (A).
In the even the main alternator fails, the system will change to display the standby
alternator.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays engine tachometer in revolutions per minute (RPM).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Tachometer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
EIS
Displays engine manifold pressure inches of mercury (IN HG).
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manifold Pressure
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
ENGINE SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EIS - Engine displays all engine, fuel, electrical, and fuel calculation information. To access this screen,
press the Engine Softkey. Refer to Table 3-1 for Engine softkey functions.
Level 1
Level 2
Description
ASSIST
Displays full EIS-ENGINE Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to the EIS
Display and top-level softkeys.
Displays a cyan box around the temperature setting and indicates the hottest cylinder.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ENGINE
DEC FUEL
Decreases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
INC FUEL
Increases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
RST FUEL
Resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to maximum fuel capacity. Resets fuel used (GAL
USED) to zero.
Table 3-1 Engine Softkeys (Normally Aspirated)
Level 1
Level 2
Description
DEC FUEL
Displays full EIS-ENGINE Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to the EIS
Display and top-level softkeys.
Decreases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
INC FUEL
Increases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
RST FUEL
Resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to maximum fuel capacity. Resets fuel used (GAL
USED) to zero.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENGINE
Table 3-2 Engine Softkeys (Turbocharged)
2
3
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
1
9
APPENDICES
8
4
5
INDEX
7
6
Figure 3-3 Engine Page (Normally-aspirated)
92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9
EIS
8
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
7
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-4 Engine Page (Turbocharged)
Displays engine tachometer in revolutions per minute (RPM).
3
Temperature Group
Displays Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) in degrees Fahrenheit (°F), Exhaust Gas
Temperature (EGT) in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) (Normally aspirated), and Turbine Inlet
Temperature (ITT) in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) (Turbocharged).
-- Normally-aspirated aircraft have an ASSIST Softkey for access of the Engine Leaning
Assist Function. When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system automatically switches
to the first peak obtained and displays the temperature deviation from peak (D PEAK)
in degrees Fahrenheit beside the EGT display for the peaked cylinder. When a cylinder
peaks, its number and display are indicated in cyan and its peak is represented by a
cyan bar on the EGT bar graph. Lean Assist continues to monitor this cylinder unless the
temperature for the cylinder exceeds peak. If peak is exceeded, Lean Assist is reset.
-- Turbocharged aircraft are not equipped with a Lean Assist function.
4
Electrical Group
Displays the essential bus current in voltage (V), the emergency battery current in voltage
(V), the main alternator current in amperes (A), the standby alternator current in amperes
(A), and the battery current in amperes (A).
-- The standby alternator current, is only displays when it is active.
5
Fuel Calculation Group
Displays calculated fuel remaining (GAL REM), fuel used (GAL USED), time remaining
(ENDUR), and range in nautical miles, (RANGE NM). The calculated range is based upon
ground speed, distance, economy and fuel remaining.
-- The fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated
from the last time the fuel was reset.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Tachometer
APPENDICES
2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displays engine manifold pressure inches of mercury (IN HG).
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red.
AFCS
Manifold Pressure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
93
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6
Cabin Temperature
Displays the temperature inside the cabin in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
7
Fuel Quantity
Displays left (L FUEL QTY) and right (R FUEL QTY) fuel quantity in gallons (GAL).
8
Oil Group
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and oil pressure in pounds per square
inch (PSI).
9
Fuel Flow
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (GPH).
EIS
FUEL CALCULATIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
Fuel calculations are based on the fuel flow totalizer and the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM), adjusted
using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to 102 gallons and fuel used display to zero
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and speed.
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to the current calculated wind effects.
For example, more fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction
is indicated by the Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol. However, it does not
calculate forecasted winds and weather from the datalink.
The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled the Fuel Range Ring appears on the Navigation
Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map.
Enabling/disabling the Fuel Range Ring and selecting a reserve fuel time:
1) Display the Navigation Map screen.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Map Settings and press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Highlight the FUEL RNG (RSV) field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the reserve fuel time, how long the aircraft can fly after reaching the
reserve fuel.
INDEX
8) Enter the desired reserve fuel time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes) and press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Screen.
94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.3 EIS DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a PFD or MFD display failure, the display(s) operating in Reversionary Mode are configured to
present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for information about display
reversionary mode).
In reversionary mode, there are three EIS displays. The Engine Display, in reversionary mode, is identical to the
normal EIS Display on the MFD. The Lean Display presents temperature information and assistance for engine
leaning. The System Display shows the fuel calculations, cabin temperature, and electrical parameters. All three
displays feature the Engine Manifold Pressure, Tachometer, Fuel Quantity, and Fuel Flow Indications.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-5 Reversionary Mode (EIS Shown)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Lean and System displays can be accessed while in reversionary mode by pressing the ENGINE Softkey,
followed by the LEAN or SYSTEM Softkey. The Engine Display is shown by default and does not require a
softkey press to be displayed unless another display is currently shown. To return to the Engine Display from the
Lean or System Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Level 1
Level 2
ENGINE
Displays on the EIS: The Engine Manifold Pressure, Tachometer, Fuel Quantity, Fuel Flow, Oil
Pressure, Oil Temperature, Exhaust Gas Temperature, Cylinder Head Temperature, Emergency
Battery voltage, Essential Buss voltage, and Main (or Standby) Alternator amperes.
LEAN
Displays on the EIS: The Engine Manifold Pressure, Tachometer, Fuel Quantity, Fuel Flow, Exhaust
Gas Temperature and lean indication for each cylinder, and Cylinder Head Temperature and lean
indications for each cylinder.
CYL SLCT Displays and cycles through the cylinders and obtain information about a cylinder, highlighted in
cyan on the bar graph(s)
ASSIST Displays the temperature deviation from peak (DPEAK) in degrees Fahrenheit below the EGT
display for the peaked cylinder.
SYSTEM
Displays on the EIS: The Engine Manifold Pressure, Tachometer, Fuel Quantity, Fuel Flow, Fuel
Calculation information, Oil Pressure and Temperature, Cabin Temperature, Battery amperes,
Emergency Battery voltage, Essential Buss voltage, and Main (or Standby) Alternator amperes.
DEC FUEL Decreases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE SOFTKEYS (REVERSIONARY MODE)
Level 3
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INC FUEL Increases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
RST FUEL Resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to maximum fuel capacity. Resets fuel used (GAL
USED) to zero.
BACK
Returns the EIS back to the ENGINE Softkey display information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 3-3 Engine Softkeys (Normally Aspirated)
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Description
ENGINE
Displays on the EIS: The Engine Manifold Pressure, Tachometer, Fuel Quantity, Fuel Flow, Oil
Pressure, Oil Temperature, Turbo Inlet Temperature, Cylinder Head Temperature, Emergency
Battery voltage, Essential Buss voltage, and Main (or Standby) Alternator amperes.
LEAN
Displays on the EIS: The Engine Manifold Pressure, Tachometer, Fuel Quantity, Fuel Flow, Turbo
Inlet Temperature, and Cylinder Head Temperature and lean indications for each cylinder.
CYL SLCT Cycles through the cylinders and obtain information about a cylinder, highlighted in cyan on the
bar graph(s)
SYSTEM
Displays on the EIS: The Engine Manifold Pressure, Tachometer, Fuel Quantity, Fuel Flow, Fuel
Calculation information, Oil Pressure and Temperature, Cabin Temperature, Battery amperes,
Emergency Battery voltage, Essential Buss voltage, and Main (or Standby) Alternator amperes.
DEC FUEL Decreases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
APPENDICES
INC FUEL Increases the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) in 1 gal increments.
RST FUEL Resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to maximum fuel capacity. Resets fuel used (GAL
USED) to zero.
BACK
Returns the EIS back to the ENGINE Softkey display information.
INDEX
Table 3-4 Engine Softkeys (Turbocharged)
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LEAN DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the current version of the
pertinent flight manual for specific values and operating limitations .
NOTE: Turbocharged aircraft are not equipped with the Lean Assist function.
EIS
The EIS Lean Display provides information and a user interface to perform engine leaning. Exhaust gas (EGT)
and cylinder head (CHT) temperatures for each cylinder are displayed in bar graph form with a displayfor
the temperature of the selected cylinder shown below each graph. By default, the cylinder with the hottest
temperature is selected (number highlighted in cyan) when the LEAN Softkey is pressed. Turbine inlet
temperature (TIT) is shown in place of EGT for turbocharged aircraft.
Bars for cylinders with temperatures in the normal range are shown in white. On the CHT Bar Graph, a
warning condition for a cylinder is indicated in red.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Accessing the EIS Lean Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the LEAN Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CYL SLCT Softkey becomes available after pressing the LEAN Softkey. The CYL SLCT Softkey can be
utilized to cycle through the cylinders and obtain information about a cylinder, highlighted in cyan on the bar
graph(s). For normally aspirated aircraft only, the CYL SLCT softkey is disabled when the ASSIST Softkey is
pressed or when a cylinder experiences a warning (red) condition. The softkey will remain disabled until the
temperature returns to normal.
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s temperatures:
AFCS
From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its temperature
information. The selected cylinder number is highlighted in cyan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An Engine Leaning Assist Function is available to assist in the leaning process for normally-aspirated aircraft.
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system automatically switches to the first peak obtained and displays
the temperature deviation from peak (DPEAK) in degrees Fahrenheit below the EGT display for the peaked
cylinder. When a cylinder peaks, its number is indicated in cyan and its peak is represented by a cyan bar
on the EGT bar graph. Lean Assist continues to monitor this cylinder unless the temperature for the cylinder
exceeds peak. If peak is exceeded, Lean Assist is reset.
APPENDICES
Selecting the Engine Leaning Assist Function (normally-aspirated aircraft):
From the Lean Display, press the ASSIST Softkey to identify the peak. The EGT for the selected cylinder (number
highlighted in cyan) and its deviation from peak temperature are displayed beneath the EGT Bar Graph.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
Turbocharged
Normally-aspirated
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-6 EIS (Engine) Display
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Tachometer
Displays engine tachometer in revolutions per minute (RPM).
3
Fuel Quantity
Displays left (L) and right (R FUEL QTY) fuel quantity in gallons (GAL).
4
Fuel Flow
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
5
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Displays Turbine Inlet Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
6
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Displays Exhaust Gas Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
7
Cylinder Head Temperature
Displays Cylinder Head Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
EIS
Displays engine manifold pressure inches of mercury (IN HG).
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manifold Pressure
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
EIS
The EIS System Display shows the engine manifold pressure, tachometer, fuel quantity and flow, fuel
calculations, and oil, cabin, and electrical indications. Fuel calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining
(GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer. The fuel remaining can be adjusted using the following softkeys:
-- DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
-- INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
-- RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining (GAL REM) relative to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and sets
the displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to adjust the fuel remaining (GAL REM).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
From the System Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This also resets totalizer-based fuel remaining (GAL
REM) relative to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and sets the displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero.
100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7
8
9
AFCS
10
11
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
13
Turbocharged
Normally-aspirated
Figure 3-7 EIS System Display (Reversionary Mode)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
101
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
Manifold Pressure
Displays engine manifold pressure inches of mercury (IN HG).
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red.
2
Tachometer
Displays engine tachometer in revolutions per minute (RPM).
3
Fuel Quantity
Displays left (L) and right (R FUEL QTY) fuel quantity in gallons (GAL).
4
Fuel Flow
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
5
Calculated Fuel Used
Displays the calculated amount of fuel used based on the totalizer fuel flow.
6
Calculated Fuel Remaining
Displays the amount of fuel remaining set by the pilot and adjusted for fuel burn.
7
Oil Pressure
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (PSI).
8
Oil Temperature
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
9
Cabin Temperature
Displays the temperature inside the cabin in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
10 Battery Current
Displays battery current in amperes (A).
11 Emergency Battery Voltage
Displays the emergency battery current in voltage (V).
12 Essential Buss Voltage
Displays the essential bus current in voltage (V).
13 Main Alternator Current
Displays main alternator current in amperes (A).
In the even the main alternator fails, the system will change to display the standby
alternator.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Standby Alternator Current
102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
EIS
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the audio panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the audio panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in PA-32 aircraft is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• Audio Panel
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
The audio panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The audio panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected
COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob
for kHz). Push to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold
this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active
frequency field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Push to turn the COM automatic squelch
on and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by pressing the ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, enter ADF frequencies, select ADF/DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME TUNING WINDOW or
NRST Window is present. Push the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob
moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident
status for the transponder.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Push to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Push to turn the Morse code identifier audio
on and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17
22
23
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciation above the key is illuminated.
106
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive
can be added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive
can be added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in PA-32 aircraft.
6
COM3 – Not used in PA-32 aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops playback of recorded COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Piper PA-32 aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, push the PILOT
Knob to enable manual squelch. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during playback of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Push to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL or SQ annunciation. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust copilot/passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must
be selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
AFCS
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA
Key is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TEL – Not used in Piper PA-32 aircraft.
EIS
8
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM 1/2 – Enables/disables Split COM mode. Split COM mode allows the pilot to transmit on COM1
while the copilot transmits simultaneously on COM2.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TUNING BOXES
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the audio panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates the COM transceiver is selected on the audio panel
(COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicates that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the audio panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top of the audio
panel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Box
COM2 MIC selected on
the audio panel
AFCS
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the audio panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciation flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Entertainment audio, if selected, is muted during active COM radio reception.
Transmit and Receive
Indicators
INDEX
Annunciation
flashes during
transmission
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust volume.
Push to enable/disable Automatic Squelch
EIS
4) Push the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
transfer frequencies between active
and standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to tune the
frequency in the Tuning Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Push the small COM Knob to move the Tuning Box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the upper and
lower radio frequency fields.
AFCS
Push the COM Knob to move the
Tuning Box between COM1 and COM2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-6 Moving the COM Tuning Box
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the audio panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
EIS
Press and hold for two seconds
to load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-7 Quick-Tuning 121.500 MHz
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
-- NEAREST AIRPORTS Window (PFD)
-- NRST – NEAREST FREQUENCIES Page
-- WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page
-- NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES Page
-- NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the NEAREST AIRPORTS
Window on the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the
Frequency Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window. A list of 25 nearest airport
identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the NRST Softkey to open
the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-8 NEAREST AIRPORTS Window (PFD)
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
AFCS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pushing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Press the ENT Key to
load a highlighted
frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn the FMS
Knob to scroll
through a list of
frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
EIS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
NEAREST AIRPORTS Menu
NEAREST FREQUENCIES Menu
NEAREST AIRSPACES Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the WPT - AIRPORT INFORMATION Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pushing
the FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with
the ENT Key.
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to load
frequency into COM
Active Frequency Field
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected airport
identifier and
information
EIS
Runway
information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into COM
Standby Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press INFO-1 Softkey
for WPT - AIRPORT
DIRECTORY Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-11 WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES, NRST – NEAREST
FREQUENCIES, and NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the
appropriate softkeys, MENU Key, FMS Knob, and ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
113
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
Figure 4-12 NRST Page Group
FREQUENCY SPACING
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP Page.
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the CHANNEL SPACING Field in the COM CONFIG Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz COM
Frequency Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-14 AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page
AFCS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, push the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pushing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
Push the VOL/SQ Knob to disable Automatic Squelch.
Push again to enable Automatic Squelch.
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 4-15 Enable/Disable Automatic Squelch
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VOLUME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
EIS
Volume level remains
for two seconds
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Box
EIS
Standby
Fields
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
-- VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is displayed
on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
-- VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is displayed
on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
-- GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow appears on the HSI and neither NAV radio is
selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
The NAV2 Radio is selected
by pressing the CDI Softkey
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the navigation
source. Audio verification of the selected station can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV
radio on the audio panel and pushing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the audio panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
APPENDICES
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
INDEX
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Push the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
transfer frequencies between Active and
Standby Frequency Fields
Push Knob to turn Morse Code audio on/off.
White ID symbol appears when audio selected.
EIS
Turn the NAV Knob to tune the
frequency in the Tuning Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 NAV Frequency Tuning
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Push the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Push the NAV Knob to switch
the Tuning Box from one NAV
radio to the other
Figure 4-19 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
VOR/LOC ID
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
audio panel. Pushing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and push the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
APPENDICES
The Morse Code Identifier for
the GHM VOR is on
Station
Identifier
INDEX
Figure 4-20 NAV Radio ID Indication
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VOLUME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
NAV Volume Level
remains for two seconds
EIS
Figure 4-21 NAV Volume Levels
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
-- WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION
-- WPT – VOR INFORMATION
-- NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
-- NRST – NEAREST VOR
-- NRST – NEAREST FREQUENCIES
-- NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pushing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the NEAREST VOR and NEAREST AIRPORTS pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
APPENDICES
Turn the FMS
Knob to scroll
through the list
of frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to load a
highlighted
frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
Figure 4-22 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
NEAREST AIRPORTS Menu
NEAREST VOR Menu
NEAREST FREQUENCIES Menu
NEAREST AIRSPACES Menu
Figure 4-23 Nearest Pages Menus
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the ENT
Key to load
the frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the VOR Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ Softkey to place
the cursor on the VOR frequency
Figure 4-24 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – NEAREST VOR Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS,
WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION, WPT – VOR INFORMATION, and NRST – NEAREST FREQUENCIES
Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys, MENU Key, FMS Knob, and ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
121
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-25 NRST Page Group
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system automatically
switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight
Management Section for details.
EIS
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
»» If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 and NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequencies that were previously in the active fields are transferred to the
standby fields.
»» If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into one or
both of the standby frequency fields, the approach frequency is transferred or loaded into both active
frequency fields.
»» If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 standby
frequency field and the NAV2 active frequency field.
»» If the current CDI navigation source is NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV2 standby
frequency field and the NAV1 active frequency field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
AFCS
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MKR/MUTE Key
annunciation is illuminated
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 Marker Beacon Keys
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
The audio panel provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciation indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not extinguish
the key annunciaiton and audio will return when overflying the next marker beacon.
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon audio is
muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciation is extinguished.
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciation illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciation extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over
a station.
ADF/DME TUNING
EIS
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
The G1000 system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by
entering the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME TUNING Window. (The softkey
may be labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME TUNING Window:
-- Active and standby ADF frequencies
-- ADF receiver mode
-- ADF receiver volume
-- DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME TUNING Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pushing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME TUNING Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob
and the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF Volume
ADF Mode
APPENDICES
DME Tuning Mode
INDEX
Figure 4-27 ADF/DME TUNING Window
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME TUNING Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME TUNING Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
Turn the small
FMS Knob to
enter data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the ENT
Key to complete
ADF frequency
entry
Turn the large
FMS Knob to
move the cursor
to the next
character
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-28 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT Key
to transfer the
ADF frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-29 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the audio panel.)
»» ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
»» ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
»» ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
»» ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the small
FMS Knob to
select ADF mode
Figure 4-30 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
AFCS
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%.
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
APPENDICES
Turn the small
FMS Knob to
adjust volume
INDEX
Figure 4-31 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME TUNING Window.
EIS
DME
Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-32 ADF/DME TUNING Window, DME Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
»» NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
»» NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
»» HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME TUNING Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pushing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME TUNING Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 345R Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – If equipped with an extended squitter, the extended squitter is transmitted periodically
and contains information such as altitude (barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification.
The purpose of extended squitter is to provide aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based
Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the
transponder code. If an error is made, the code selection cursor can be moved back to the left one digit with
each press of the BKSP Softkey.
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with either the
softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ALT
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON
IDENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STBY
XPDR
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The
Standby, On, and ALT softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AFCS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY Mode (white code
number and mode)
APPENDICES
Figure 4-33 Standby Mode
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
Airborne ON Mode
(No altitude reporting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
On-Ground ON Mode
(No altitude reporting)
Figure 4-34 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure altitude information.
The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and
white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable
replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
On-Ground ALT Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Airborne ALT Mode
Figure 4-35 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
APPENDICES
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
INDEX
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-36 Reply Indication
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
EIS
Figure 4-37 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a
Code
AFCS
Figure 4-38 Entering a Code with Softkeys
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
IDENT FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
EIS
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
IDNT
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-39 IDENT Softkey and Indication
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER APPLICATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The audio panel performs a self-test when power is applied. During the self-test all audio panel annunciation
lights illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are
restored to those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the audio panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-40 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys
INTERCOM
AFCS
The audio panel includes a six-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to four passengers. The intercom keys provide pilot and copilot isolation from passengers and
aircraft radios.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-41 Intercom Controls
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
133
COPLT KEY
Annunciation
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC 1
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, MUSIC 1
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, copilot, passengers,
MUSIC 2
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot,
passengers,
MUSIC 1
Copilot,
passengers,
MUSIC 2
EIS
OFF
ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers, MUSIC 1
Copilot
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
MUSIC 2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PILOT KEY
Annunciation
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers;
MUSIC 2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
OFF
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciation is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciation is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciations are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot but can
communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciations are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios and is
able to communicate with everyone else.
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pushing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
ƒƒ When the MAN SQ Annunciation is extinguished, Automatic Squelch is active and the PILOT/PASS
Knob controls volume. Pushing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection.
ƒƒ When the MAN SQ Annunciation is illuminated, Manual Squelch is active and the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls either volume or squelch (selected by pushing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL
or SQ annunciation).
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Manual Squelch Annunciation;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On for
Manual Squelch
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Volume Annunciation
EIS
Copilot/Passenger
volume or Manual
Squelch
Pilot Volume or Manual Squelch.
Press to switch between VOL and SQ.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-42 Volume/Squelch Control
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is selected on the audio panel, the COM MIC Annunciation is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that no COM is selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciation flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PA Key is selected on the
audio panel
AFCS
Figure 4-43 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
The audio panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciation flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciation turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press MKR/MUTE
Key to stop playback
EIS
PLAY Key Controls
the Play Function
Figure 4-44 Marker Mute and Play Keys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SPLIT COM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciation is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the COM1/2
annunciation is extinguished.
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciation flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciation
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
APPENDICES
COM1 is used by the Pilot
COM2 is used by the Copilot
INDEX
COM1/2 (Split COM) selected
Figure 4-45 Split COM Operation
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2 inputs cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The audio panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These inputs
are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm
stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the
entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks. The current ICS state of isolation affects
the distribution of MUSIC 1 entertainment.
EIS
MUSIC 1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MUSIC 1 can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT Key and the COPLT Key Annunciations
are extinguished. MUSIC 1 can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Key Annunciation is illuminated
and by the copilot when the PILOT Key Annunciation is illuminated.
MUSIC 1 Muting
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MUSIC 1 muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. MUSIC 1 is always soft
muted when an interruption occurs from an aircraft radio. Soft muting is the gradual return of MUSIC 1 to
its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC 1 volume to return to normal is between one-half
and four seconds.
MUSIC 1 Muting Enable/Disable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches MUSIC 1 muting on and off. When
switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two beeps
indicate music muting is disabled. MUSIC 1 muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
MUSIC 2
MUSIC 2 can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
AFCS
XM ROPTIONAL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks removes the XM Radio Audio from that input.
For example, if passengers prefer their own music while the pilot listens to the XM Radio, the entertainment
audio should be connected to the MUSIC 2 jack.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
EIS
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After power application, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the audio panel as well as preventing
pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot boards the
aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the audio panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot and Copilot
ICS Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or Manual
Squelch
Volume
Annunciation
Squelch
Annunciation
Figure 4-46 Audio Panel Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify the PILOT Key and COPLT Key Annunciations are extinguished.
2) Verify manual squelch is set to full open.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the intercom level to max volume (least amount
of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
INDEX
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciation on the audio panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-47 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-48 COM Tuning Failure
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
AFCS
If there is a failure of the audio panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker.
REVERSIONARY MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
Figure 4-49 Display Backup Button
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
139
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
EIS
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
The most prominent parts of the system are the Primary Flight Displays (PFD) and a Multi Function Display
(MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is displayed on the PFD and the
MFD.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( – , decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out
(+, increasing).
The DIRECT TO Window, the FLIGHT PLAN Window, the PROCEDURES Window, and the NEAREST
AIRPORTS Window can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed
in detail later in the section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
– DIRECT TO Window
– FLIGHT PLAN Window
– PROCEDURES Window
– NEAREST AIRPORTS Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
Navigation Data Bar
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Aviation Data
– Geographic Data
– Topographic Data
– Hazard Data
Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Range
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the Navigation Map
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
APPENDICES
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
Figure 5-3 PFD Navigation Status Box
INDEX
-- Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘¯ KICT’ or ‘KIXD ¯ KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right
to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
-- Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The symbols used in the PFD status box are:
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Leg
EIS
Right Holding Pattern
Ground Speed
ISA Relative Temperature
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Air Speed
Track Angle Error
Track
Vertical Speed Required
Crosstrack
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GS
ISA
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
VSR
XTK
Bearing
Distance
Desired Track
Endurance
ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Fuel on Board
Fuel over Destination
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
BRG
DIS
DTK
END
ENR
ESA
ETA
ETE
FOB
FOD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
AFCS
Figure 5-4 MFD Navigation Data Bar
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
Box on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and
ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) Select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
APPENDICES
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD DATA BAR FIELDS Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data option.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most maps can
display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Nav range ring
• Fuel range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and
bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Topography scale
• Topography data
• Obstacle data
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
•
•
•
•
All Map Group Pages (MAP)
All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
AUX – TRIP PLANNING Page
All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
•
•
•
•
All Flight Plan Group Pages (FPL)
DIRECT TO Window
PFD Inset Map
Procedure Loading Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-5 Map Orientation
APPENDICES
-- NORTH UP aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
-- TRACK UP aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
-- DTK UP (Desired track up) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
-- HDG UP (Heading up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
INDEX
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page. Any other displays
that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Setup
Option
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
‘Map’ Group
Orientation Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Auto North Up Field
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-7 MAP SETUP Window – ‘Map’ Group
AFCS
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key to display the MAP SETUP Window.
3) With the ‘Map’ Group selected, turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ORIENTATION
Field.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the AUTO NORTH UP Field.
EIS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
AFCS
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Range Overzoom
Figure 5-8 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
INDEX
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on MAP SETUP Window).
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact areas. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum look forward times (set on the
MAP SETUP Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
»» Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
»» Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the
auto zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
»» Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
»» The TIME OUT value (set on the MAP SETUP Window for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the TIME OUT value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
»» When the MAX LOOK FWD time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
»» When the MIN LOOK FWD time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Configuring automatic zoom:
AFCS
1) With the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the AUTO ZOOM Field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘All On’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the MAX LOOK FWD Field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat Step 8 for the MIN LOOK FWD Field (zero to 99 minutes) and TIME OUT Field (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map panning allows the pilot to:
-- View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
-- Highlight and select locations on the map
-- Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
-- Designate locations for use in flight planning
-- Graphically create user waypoints
-- Measure the bearing and distance from the aircraft present position to any location on the navigation map, or
between any two points on the navigation map
-- View obstacle, airspace, and airway information
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer Information
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map – Map Pointer Activated
INDEX
APPENDICES
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Panning the map:
1) Push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
EIS
Information about Point of
Interest
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer on
POI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map – Map Pointer on Point of Interest
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
AFCS
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the information page for the selected waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the information page and return to the
Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
EIS
Information about
Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
Airspace
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map – Map Pointer on Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the INFORMATION
Window for the selected airspace.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the INFORMATION Window.
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may
be calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page menu.
The bearing and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically
identifying points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is
provided in a window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ option.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the page menu
and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map – Measuring Bearing and Distance
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map.
Displaying/removing Profile View:
1) From the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page, press the MAP Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ and press the ENT Key.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Black Background
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
TOPO On
AFCS
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map – Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
APPENDICES
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map page menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
INDEX
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Highlight the TOPO DATA Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
EIS
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the TOPO DATA range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
AFCS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
APPENDICES
Ground Elevation at Map Pointer
Location (only visible when Map
Pointer is displayed)
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map – TOPO SCALE
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the TOPO SCALE Field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
EIS
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
MAP SYMBOLS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of
symbol can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering
of the symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
15
30
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Highways and Roads
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Railroads (RAILROAD)
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Symbol
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Land Symbols
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
EIS
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
300
50
100
3
20
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Off
100
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
15
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
VRP (VRP WAYPOINT)
15
30
200
500
CL B/TMA/AWY
See Additional Features
APPENDICES
150
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
500
AFCS
200
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Large Airports (LARGE APT) (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT) (8100 ft > Longest
Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airports (SMALL APT) (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
(see below)
Class B (CL B) and Terminal Manoeuvring Area (TMA)**
INDEX
Airway (AWY)**
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Aviation Symbols
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CL C/CTA
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
(see below)
Class C Airspace (CL C)
200
500
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
200
500
EIS
Control Area (CTA)**
CL A/D
(see below)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terminal Radar Service Area (TRSA),
Controlled Traffic Region (CTR)**, and Class A (CL A)**
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class D
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other
(see below)
ADIZ
Alert
AFCS
Class E**
Class G**
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temporary**
Danger, Warning, Unknown, Special Rules**,
and Training**
APPENDICES
* Label placement and range is determined by the system for best display and minimal clutter
** Not located in the United States
INDEX
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections)
are also displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-15 Airways on MFD Navigation Map
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAY
Softkey presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page. The
Airway range can also be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below
a specific number.
APPENDICES
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only.
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only.
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed.
Or:
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRWAYS Field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
Airway Display Selection
Low Altitude Airway Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-16 Navigation – Airways Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the LOW ALT AIRWAY or the HI ALT AIRWAY range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
AFCS
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
APPENDICES
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT
AIRWAY)
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
300
500
INDEX
Table 5-3 Airway Range Information
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYMBOL SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display land, aviation, airspace and airway symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway
extensions, railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear
on the display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from
each runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings
option.
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The page menu is displayed and the
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Highlight the LAND DATA Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ Group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
AFCS
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
8) Select the desired range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DECLUTTER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map – Declutter Level Indications
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Decluttering the map:
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each softkey press, another level of map
information is removed.
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map level. The ‘X’ represents map items decluttered
for each level of selection.
Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
VRPs
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 5-4 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Level
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation maps can display some additional items. Some items can be displayed through the use of the
nearest frequency, map panning, and map measuring functions. Other items (e.g. SVT field of view, track
vector, selected altitude intercept arc, wind vector, and fuel range ring) can be displayed/removed individually
through the MAP SETUP Window option. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information on displaying
obstacles (Point Obstacle, Wire Obstacle) on the map.
The icons in the following table will be displayed when specific navigation map functions are conducted or
the heading or GPS solution is invalid:
EIS
Symbol Name
ARTCC Frequency
or FSS Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer
Description
Displayed when using the Nearest Frequencies function (see
Audio Panel and CNS Section)
Displayed when panning (see Using Map Displays in Flight
Management)
Measuring Pointer
Displayed when measuring bearing and distance (see Using Map
Displays in Flight Management)
No heading
aircraft icon
Replaces the normal aircraft icon when aircraft GPS location is
valid, but the heading is invalid.
Dead reckoning
aircraft icon
‘DR’ text displayed over the aircraft icon when the GPS solution
is invalid (see Abnormal Operations in Flight Management)
Symbol
Table 5-5 Miscellaneous Navigation Map Symbols
TRACK VECTOR
AFCS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track
vector is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is
selectable (30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track
vector. The track vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Track Vector
APPENDICES
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map – Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
162
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the TRACK VECTOR Field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
WIND VECTOR
Wind Direction
EIS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the display. Wind vector
information is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind
speeds greater than or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map – Wind Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the WIND VECTOR Field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NAV RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range (radius)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map – Nav Range Ring
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the NAV RANGE RING Field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
INDEX
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the
AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map – Fuel Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the FUEL RNG (RSV) Field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This
is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lateral Field of
View Boundaries
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-22 Navigation Map – Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the FIELD OF VIEW Field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected
altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude
Intercept Arc
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map – Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The MAP SETUP Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the SEL ALT ARC Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview Section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As
a waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the system’s Spell’N’Find feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the ¯ Key on any of the waypoint pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
– Waypoint Identifier
– Type (symbol)
– Facility Name
– City
Entered Waypoint on Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
AFCS
Waypoint Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-24 WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a DUPLICATE
WAYPOINTS Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-25 WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window – Duplicate Identifier
AIRPORTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: North Up orientation on the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page cannot be changed; the pilot
needs to be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the WPT –
AIRPORT INFORMATION Page Map.
AFCS
The WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page allows the pilot to view airport information, load frequencies
(COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be involved in the
flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies (auto-tuning).
After engine startup, the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the WPT –
AIRPORT INFORMATION Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES. For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This
information is viewed on the by pressing the INFO Softkey until ‘INFO-1’ is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
– ID/Facility/City
– Usage Type/Region
– Lat/Long/Elev
– Fuel Available
– Time Zone (UTC Offset)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airport
Shown
Runway Information
EIS
– Designation
– Length/Width/Surface
– Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Identification
– Frequency
– Availability
– Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-26 WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page:
-- Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
-- Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
-- Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
-- COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– ID/Facility/City
– Usage Type/Region
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-27 Airport Directory Example
The airport directory information is viewed on the WPT – AIRPORT DIRECTORY Page by pressing the INFO
Softkey until ‘INFO-2’ is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available)
on the WPT – AIRPORT DIRECTORY Page:
Weather: Service Type, Frequency,
Phone Number
Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
Hours: Facility Hours, Light Hours, Tower
Hours, Beacon Hours
Flight Service Station (FSS): FSS
Name, Phone Numbers
Special Operations at Airport
Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
Instrument Approaches:
Published Approach, Frequency
Services Available: Category, Specific
Service
Frequencies: Type/Frequency
NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier, Frequency,
Radial, Distance
Notes: Airport Notes
Transportation: Ground
Transportation Type Available
Noise: Noise Abatement Procedures
Pilot Controlled Lighting: High/
Med/Low Clicks/Second
Approach: Approach Facility Name,
Frequency, Frequency Parameter
Charts: Low Altitude Chart Number
FBO: Type, Frequencies, Services,
Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards, Phone/Fax
Numbers
APPENDICES
Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Runway: Headings, Length, Width,
Obstructions, Surface
AFCS
Traffic Pattern Altitudes (TPA):
Aircraft Class/Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport: Identifier, Site Number, Name,
City, State
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page, push the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page displayed, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the RUNWAYS Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, push the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The
Destination Airport is displayed.
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
* May include Additional Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-6 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
INDEX
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION
Page. See the Procedures portion of this section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport
can be selected for display (see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
The system provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The NEAREST AIRPORTS Window displays a list
of up to 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three, they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Length of Longest Runway
COM Freq. Info.
– Identification
– Frequency
Additional Airports (within
200 nm)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-28 NEAREST AIRPORTS Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window, pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD AIRPORT INFORMATION
Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window
with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the
information pages for all airports in the list.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Information
– ID/Type/City
– Facility
Airport Information
– Usage/Time/Elev
– Region
AFCS
Airport Information
– Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-29 AIRPORT INFORMATION Window on PFD
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
The NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its
potential use in the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected
airport and surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled NEAREST
AIRPORTS, INFORMATION, RUNWAYS, FREQUENCIES, and APPROACHES.
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to three approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be
scrolled. If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently
selected airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– ID/Type
– Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
– Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
– Designation/Surface
– Length/Width
EIS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
– Identification
– Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Figure 5-30 NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window. Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the AIRPORT INFORMATION
Window.
AFCS
3) To return to the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on BACK) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves
through the airport list, alternating between the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window and the AIRPORT INFORMATION
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the NEAREST AIRPORTS Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the NEAREST AIRPORTS Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may
already be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Press the APT Softkey; or push the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the NEAREST AIRPORTS Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
INDEX
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the RUNWAYS Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures portion of this section for
approaches.
The NEAREST AIRPORTS Box on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page defines the minimum runway length
and surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD NRST – NEAREST
AIRPORTS Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small
runways or runways that are not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or
meters) for runway length and HARD/SOFT for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the NEAREST APT Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway surface option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER).
5) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the NEAREST APT Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airport Criteria
– Type of Runway Surface
– Minimum Runway Length
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 5-31 AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page, Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the WPT – INTERSECTION INFORMATION Page is the nearest VOR, not
necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection.
The WPT – INTERSECTION INFORMATION Page is used to view information about intersections. In
addition to displaying a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled INTERSECTION, INFORMATION, and NEAREST VOR.
EIS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Region
– Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
– Identifier/Type (symbol)
– Radial to VOR
– Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-32 WPT – INTERSECTION INFORMATION Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the WPT – INTERSECTION INFORMATION Page displayed, enter an identifier in the INTERSECTION Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the NRST – NEAREST INTERSECTIONS Page displayed, push the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the NEAREST INT Box.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
The NRST – NEAREST INTERSECTIONS Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight
path. In addition to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25
nearest intersections in three boxes labeled NEAREST INT, INFORMATION, and REFERENCE VOR.
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven Intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
176
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Intersection Information
– Identifier/Symbol
– Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
EIS
Intersection Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reference VOR Info
– Identifier/Type (symbol)
– VOR Frequency
– Bearing/Distance to VOR
Nearest Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-33 NRST – NEAREST INTERSECTIONS Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NDBS
The WPT – NDB INFORMATION Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes
labeled NDB, INFORMATION, FREQUENCY, and NEAREST AIRPORT.
AFCS
NDB Identifier/Type
– Facility Name
– Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
– Type
– Region
– Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
APPENDICES
– Identifier/Type (symbol)
– Bearing/Distance to Airport
INDEX
Figure 5-34 WPT – NDB INFORMATION Page
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an NDB:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key.
1) With the WPT – NDB INFORMATION Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in
which it’s located in the NDB Box.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the NRST – NEAREST NDB Page displayed, push the FMS Knob
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the NEAREST NDB Box.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The NRST – NEAREST NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to
displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three
boxes labeled NEAREST NDB, INFORMATION, and FREQUENCY.
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Bearing/Distance to NDB
from aircraft position
AFCS
Nearest NDB
NDB Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
– Facility Name/City
– Type
– Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-35 NRST – NEAREST NDB Page
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The WPT – VOR INFORMATION Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since
ILS signals can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer
information cannot be viewed on the WPT – VOR INFORMATION Page. If a VOR station is combined with a
TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the WPT – VOR INFORMATION Page and if it includes only DME,
it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the WPT – VOR
INFORMATION Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled VOR, INFORMATION, FREQUENCY,
and NEAREST AIRPORT.
EIS
VOR Identifier/Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Facility Name
– Nearest City
VOR Information
– Class/Magnetic Variation
– Region
– Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
– Identifier/Type (symbol)
– Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-36 WPT – VOR INFORMATION Page
AFCS
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the WPT – VOR INFORMATION Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in
which it’s located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the NRST – NEAREST VOR Page displayed, push the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the NEAREST VOR Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the NRST – NEAREST VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the NEAREST VOR Box.
EIS
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The NRST – NEAREST VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV
frequency from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the NRST – NEAREST VOR Page. In addition to
displaying a map of the surrounding area, the NRST – NEAREST VOR Page displays information for up to 25
nearest VOR stations in three boxes labeled NEAREST VOR, INFORMATION, and FREQUENCY. The list only
includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
VOR Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
– Facility Name/City
– Class/Magnetic Variation
– Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Nearest VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-37 NRST – NEAREST VOR Page
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VRPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The WPT – VRP INFORMATION Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs).
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled VRP and INFORMATION.
Selected VRP
VRP Identifier/Symbol
EIS
– VRP Name
VRP Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Country
– Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
– Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-38 WPT – VRP INFORMATION Page
AFCS
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the WPT – VRP INFORMATION Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the VRP Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the NRST – NEAREST VRP Page displayed, push the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the NEAREST VRP Box.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
The NRST – NEAREST VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to
displaying a map of the surrounding area, the NRST – NEAREST VRP Page displays information for up to 25
nearest VRPs in two boxes labeled NEAREST VRP and INFORMATION. The list only includes VRPs that are
within 200 nm.
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to eleven VRPs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest VRP
VRP Identifier/Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
– Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– VRP Name
– Country
– Lat/Long
Figure 5-39 NRST – NEAREST VRP Page
USER WAYPOINTS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-TRIP PLANNING Page, or Procedure pages) by selecting a position
on the map using the Joystick, or from the WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page by referencing a bearing/
distance from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a
waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon
system power down.
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
User Waypoint Info
User Wpt Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– Identifier
– Temporary/Normal
– Waypoint Type
Reference Wpt/Info
– Identifier/Rad/Dist or
– Identifiers/Radials or
– Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
EIS
– Identifier
– Comment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
# User Wpts Used
GO BACK displayed if User
Wpt was created on map
page
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-40 WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page
Selecting a User Waypoint:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the USER WAYPOINT LIST Box using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
AFCS
1) With the NRST – NEAREST USER WPTS Page displayed, push the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the NEAREST USR Box.
3) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
– Identifier
– Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
EIS
User Waypoint Info
– Comment
– Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected User Waypoint
– Identifier
– Radial/Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-41 NRST – NEAREST USER WPTS Page
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page in the following ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from the WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page:
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the cursor to the TEMPORARY
Field and pressing the ENT Key to check the box.
INDEX
7) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With YES highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the cursor to the TEMPORARY
Field and pressing the ENT Key to check the box.
8) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-42 WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
APPENDICES
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page is displayed with the captured position.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the cursor to the TEMPORARY
Field and pressing the ENT Key to check the box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page displayed, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the USER WAYPOINT LIST Box, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the USER WAYPOINT LIST Box. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU
Key and select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
APPENDICES
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
4) With YES highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the USER WAYPOINT LIST Box, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
EIS
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the USER WAYPOINT LIST Box, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint
information page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select NORMAL or TEMPORARY as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION Page.
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
AFCS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. YES is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the USER WAYPOINT LIST Box, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B, TMA, and Airways surrounding TMA, Class
C, CTA, Class A, Class D, Restricted (Prohibited), MOA (Military), and other airspace provided by the navigation
database. Some examples of typical airspaces are depicted below. See the Map Symbols portion of this section for
the maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area. Temporary Flight
Restrictions (TFRs) are discussed in the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
Class D Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Class B Airspace
MOA (Military)
Restricted Area
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Class C Airspace
Alert Area
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
Warning Area
APPENDICES
Figure 5-43 Airspaces
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES Page on the MFD provides additional information about airspaces and the
location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
The AIRSPACE ALERTS BOX on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page allows the pilot to turn the controlled/specialuse airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES
Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map. It simply turns on/off the system message
provided on the PFD when the aircraft is approaching or near an airspace.
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
The following system messages will be generated on the PFD when airspace alerts are set to ON:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Table 5-7 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ALTITUDE BUFFER Field in the AIRSPACE ALERTS Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the AIRSPACE ALERTS Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the ‘Aviation’ Group in the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP
Page setup menu. See Table 5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol
used to define the airspace area.
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In
addition, a selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from this page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the page displays airspace information in four boxes labeled
AIRSPACE ALERTS, AIRSPACE AGENCY, VERTICAL LIMITS, and FREQUENCIES.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Alerts Info
Airspace 1
EIS
– Name
– Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
– Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Airspace Type
– Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
– Ceiling
– Floor
Airspace 2
Associated Frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Type
– Availability/Info
– Frequency
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-44 NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES Page
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists. The ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place
the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or more frequencies exist for a selected
airspace.
AFCS
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the NRST – NEAREST AIRSPACES Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or push the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the AIRSPACE ALERTS Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
Figure 5-45 Smart Airspace
Turning smart airspace on or off:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the GROUP Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Aviation’ in the GROUP Box and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SMART AIRSPACE Field.
AFCS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the ¯ Key on either the MFD or PFD, is quicker to
use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The DIRECT TO Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The DIRECT TO Window
displays selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
– Identifier/Symbol/Region
– Facility Name
– City
VNV Constraints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Altitude at Arrival
– Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Location of Destination
– Bearing/Distance
Desired Course
AFCS
Figure 5-46 DIRECT TO Window – MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Direct-to Point Info
– Identifier/Symbol/City
– Facility Name
VNV Constraints
APPENDICES
– Altitude at Arrival
– Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
– Bearing/Distance
– Desired Course
Activation Command
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 5-47 DIRECT TO Window – PFD
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the DIRECT TO Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the ¯ Key. The DIRECT TO Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu; press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ACTIVATE? Field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the DIRECT TO
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD), or the Flight Plan Window (PFD).
Waypoint Submenu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Flight Plan Waypoints
– Nearest Airports
– Recent Waypoints
– User Waypoints
– Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
Figure 5-48 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the ¯ Key. The DIRECT TO Window is displayed with the active
flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the ¯ Key.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the DIRECT TO
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the ¯ Key. The DIRECT TO Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the default
selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
The DIRECT TO Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to
navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active
flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page
defaults to the displayed waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the ¯ Key to display the DIRECT TO Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Page and
push the FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the ¯ Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named MAPWPT is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ¯ Key to display the DIRECT TO Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the DIRECT TO Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the COURSE Field on the DIRECT TO Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the ¯ Key. The DIRECT TO Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the ¯ Key. The DIRECT TO Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ACTIVATE?.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint,
or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior
to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to.
All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the DIRECT TO Window.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the VNV Field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. If the waypoint is an airport, the option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
INDEX
5) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select MSL or AGL.
196
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ACTIVATE? Field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the DIRECT TO Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan
Symbol Name
Description
Symbol
EIS
Course leg currently flown
Course Leg
A future course leg in the current phase of flight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A course leg in either a previously flown course leg, or
a future course leg not in the current phase of flight
Heading Leg
Heading leg currently flown
Future heading leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning path currently flown
Roll Steering
Path*
Turning path for the next flight plan leg
Turning path beyond the next flight plan leg
Displayed when sequencing to the next flight plan leg
via a fly-by waypoint, a lead turn is created, adjusting
for groundspeed
Displayed as a fly-over waypoint (see the Flight
Fly-Over Waypoint
Planning portion in the Flight Management Section)
Displayed when an along track waypoint is created
Along Track
(see the Flight Planning portion in the Flight
Waypoint
Management Section)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Anticipation
Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Path Fix
A fix that terminates: manually, at a specified
altitude, or at a specified distance or radial when
flying a heading
APPENDICES
When vertically navigating, the system will display
Top of Descent
where the aircraft will begin complete the descent
(TOD) and Bottom
(see the Vertical Navigation portion in the Flight
of Descent (BOD)
Management Section)
Parallel Track
Waypoint
Displayed when a parallel track is created (see Flight
Planning portion in the Flight Management Section)
INDEX
* Roll Steering Path transitions between two disconnected legs (i.e. holding), some procedure
turn segments, parallel track segments, or after some fly-over waypoints (discussed later in this
section).
Table 5-8 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can
be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SELECTION AND MODIFICATION METHODS
AFCS
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
-- FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
-- FLIGHT PLAN Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
-- FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
To create or modify a flight plan, the cursor can be used to edit the required fields within the flight plan and
the CURRENT VNV PROFILE Box within the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page. The cursor will appear as a
field consisting of a solid cyan or magenta rectangle. The cursor can be activated by pushing the FMS Knob.
Fields can be highlighted by turning the large FMS Knob, and edits can be accomplished within the field by
combining small and large FMS Knob turns.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active FPL Waypoint List
– Comment
– Procedure Header
– Waypoint Identifier
– Airway Identifier
– Desired Track to Waypoint
– Distance to Waypoint
– Waypoint Altitude Constraint
EIS
Active Flight Plan
Leg
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
– Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
– Vertical Speed Target
– Flight Path Angle
– Vertical Speed Target
– Time to Top of Descent
– Vertical Deviation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-49 FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page
Active Flight Plan Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
AFCS
– Waypoint ID
– Desired Track to Waypoint
– Distance to Waypoint
– Airway Identifier
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-50 FLIGHT PLAN Window on PFD
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Catalog Contents
– # Used
– # Empty
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan List
– Comment
EIS
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Departure Waypoint
– Destination Waypoint
– Total Flight Plan Distance
– Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
Figure 5-51 FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN DISPLAY
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information
is displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA),
and Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
AFCS
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LEG-LEG Softkey
CUM Softkey
Figure 5-52 Active Flight Plan – Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Wide View
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
NARROW Softkey
WIDE Softkey
Figure 5-53 Active Flight Plan – Wide vs. Narrow View
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The active flight plan is listed on the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page on the MFD, and in the FLIGHT
PLAN Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is
shown on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page, and
are available for activation (becomes the active flight plan).
The following procedure is intended to provide an overview of basic flight plan creation. It will create a flight
plan from the origin to the destination, and includes enroute waypoint selection. The following procedure
does not include airways or terminal procedures. For instructions on how to add airways to a flight plan,
see the Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications discussion later in this Flight Planning Section. For
information on departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches see the Procedures Section.
EIS
NOTE: The system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required for the PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window. (Turning it clockwise displays
a blank Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the WAYPOINT INFORMATION
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or
airway waypoints).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to enter the origin airport, each flight plan waypoint, and the destination airport.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, push the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a
blank WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the WAYPOINT INFORMATION
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or
airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
7) When all waypoints have been entered, push the FMS Knob to return to the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG
Page. The new flight plan is now in the list.
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT AND AIRWAY MODIFICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All flight plans can be edited at any time. Waypoints and airways can be added, modified, or removed from
any flight plan. Edits made to an active flight plan affect navigation as soon as they are entered. Modifications
to flight planned departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches are discussed later in the Procedures
portion of Flight Management.
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS
EIS
Flight plans are limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the
number of waypoints in the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary
waypoints.” appears and the new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Adding Waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To add a waypoint, choose the flight plan, select the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint,
and the waypoint will be added prior to the selected waypoint. Either the WAYPOINT INFORMATION
Window or Waypoint Submenu can be used when entering the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window has duplicates, a DUPLICATE
WAYPOINTS Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Memory Slot
– Comment
– Procedure Identifier
– Waypoint Identifier
– Airway Identifier
– Desired Track to Waypoint
– Distance to Waypoint
– Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Softkeys
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-54 FPL – STORED FLIGHT PLAN Page
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Full Message
EIS
Figure 5-55 Flight Plan Full
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select EDIT and press the
ENT Key. The FPL – STORED FLIGHT PLAN Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a
blank WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the WAYPOINT INFORMATION
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or
airway waypoints).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
AFCS
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-56 DUPLICATE WAYPOINTS Window
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a
blank WAYPOINT INFORMATION Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the WAYPOINT INFORMATION
Window with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or
airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function on the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page and pan to the map
location of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Individual waypoints and airways can be removed from a flight plan. Some waypoints in the final
approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be removed individually. Attempting to remove a
waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification’. To remove a
waypoint, choose the flight plan, select the desired point of insertion or waypoint to remove, enter/remove
the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint.
AFCS
Removing Waypoints
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in the removal of the end waypoint
of the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the removed waypoint is created and activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Removing an individual waypoint from a flight plan:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key, and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on PFD).
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
APPENDICES
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page
and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
INDEX
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The FPL – STORED
FLIGHT PLAN Page is displayed.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be removed.
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight CANCEL and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Fly-Over Waypoints
EIS
Waypoints entered in the enroute segment of the flight plan may be treated as either fly-by or fly-over
waypoints.
If the system determines the flight plan leg geometry cannot support fly-by navigation for a waypoint
sequence in the current flight plan, it will change a fly-by waypoint to a fly-over waypoint automatically.
A roll steering path or future roll steering path may be displayed after the fly-over waypoint until the roll
steering path aligns with the course leg connecting the fly-over waypoint and the following waypoint in the
flight plan. This system generated fly-over waypoint will not display the fly-over symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fly-Over Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Roll Steering to next leg
– Roll Steering until path aligns with
course leg (PNH to ILOZA)
Active Leg to PNH
– Geometry cannot support
fly-by to the following leg
(PNH to ILOZA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-57 PNH Fly-Over Waypoint
FLIGHT PLAN AIRWAYS
AFCS
Adding Airways
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the
desired airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway
entry point, select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be
loaded if there is a waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival
or approach procedure. The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight
plan waypoints.
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a
directional restriction over the whole route that can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
ƒƒ Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
ƒƒ Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
ƒƒ Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the
flight plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
EIS
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of Selected
Airway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-58 Select Airway Page – Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Load Airway’. The FPL – SELECT AIRWAY Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway”
menu item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the
cursor position).
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by all altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. LOAD? is
highlighted.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
EIS
Airway Exit Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-59 Selecting Airway Exit Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Airway Header
AFCS
– Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-60 Airway Inserted in Active Flight Plan
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing Airways
Removing an entire airway from a flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key.
Or:
For a stored flight plan:
a) Press the FPL Key for the MFD. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page
and push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘Edit’ and press
the ENT Key; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The FPL – STORED
FLIGHT PLAN Page is displayed.
2) Select the header of the airway to be removed.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight CANCEL and
press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Collapsing Airways
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight
Plan Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value
is inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a
collapsed airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is
automatically expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight
plan review.
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
INDEX
APPENDICES
Expanded View
Figure 5-61 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
FLIGHT PLAN OPERATIONS
EIS
This section will discuss activating a flight plan leg, and conducting enroute operations such as creating an
along track offset, parallel track, closest point from a reference point and user defined holding. For information
on departures, arrivals, and approaches refer to the Procedures portion in the Flight Management Section.
In-flight, the system automatically sequences through the active flight plan, with the exception of manually
terminated legs (such as FM, HM, or VM) that can occur within procedures (refer to the Procedures Section later
in the Flight Management Section).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The flight plan leg which is currently being used for navigation guidance is referred to as the ‘active leg’.
The system automatically sequences from one active leg to the next as defined by the active flight plan. Any
leg in the active flight plan successive to the leg currently being flown may be selected to become the new
active leg.
NOTE: When manually activating an AF or RF leg in the flight plan while the aircraft is outside the sweep
of the arc (outside the start and end radials), leg sequencing will be suspended.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
AFCS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ACTIVATE highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight CANCEL and press
the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight
plan. Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the
system reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances
can be entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along
track offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results
in an along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an
along track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at
or after the final approach fix of an approach.
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
EIS
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and
Distance
Figure 5-62 Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
AFCS
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/ – 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of
the current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the
parallel course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the
parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
EIS
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The PARALLEL TRACK Window is
displayed with the direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select LEFT or RIGHT and press the ENT Key. The DISTANCE Field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ACTIVATE PARALLEL TRACK
is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Parallel Track Waypoints
Original Track
Parallel Track
AFCS
– TIFTO-p
– TOP-p
– SLN-p
– HYS-p
– LAA-p
–…
Activating Parallel Track affects
the active flight plan from the
current position on (will not
affect an approach)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-63 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the
status indicates the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the active
leg type.
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The PARALLEL TRACK Window is
displayed with CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK? highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
Closest Point of FPL calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Location of Hold
Hold Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
(TIME or DIST))
Leg Length
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Time, Distance Mode
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-64 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the COURSE field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select INBOUND or OUTBOUND course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select TIME or DIST length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select RIGHT or LEFT turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while LOAD? is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT Window
appears with the COURSE Field highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select INBOUND or OUTBOUND course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select TIME or DIST length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select RIGHT or LEFT turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Press the ENT Key while ACTIVATE? is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Hold Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Mode
(TIME or DIST))
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Activate Hold
Figure 5-65 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
1) Press a ¯ Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select HOLD? instead of ACTIVATE? when
finished.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select INBOUND or OUTBOUND course direction, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select TIME or DIST length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select RIGHT or LEFT turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key while ACTIVATE? is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AFCS
4) Select OK and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select CANCEL
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press a ¯ Key to display the DIRECT TO Window.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU Window with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode
(TIME or DIST))
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further Clearance
Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold and Activate
Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint Selection
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 5-66 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ARRIVAL ALERTS Box on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page allows arrival alert messages to be turned
On/Off and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts provided on the PFD alerts window and
Navigation Status Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
When Arrival Alerts is set to ‘On’, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint – [xxxx]” is displayed on the
PFD. When Arrival Alerts is set to ‘Off’, only the PFD Navigation Status Box message “Arriving at waypoint”
is displayed, and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is approximately ten seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-67 Arrival Alert Settings
Enabling/disabling the Arrival Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the On/Off Field in the ARRIVAL ALERT Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the ARRIVAL ALERT Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
MANAGING FLIGHT PLANS
APPENDICES
The pilot can manage flight plans by importing/exporting via SD Card and by storing, copying, inverting,
and deleting. Also, the comment field (name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for
identification and sorting.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the FPL Key to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
4) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Import Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
If an existing flight plan is selected, an ‘Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL’ prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on
the SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select CANCEL using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
EIS
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Import/Export Softkeys
Import Successful
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Figure 5-68 Flight Plan Import
APPENDICES
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
INDEX
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Export Flight Plan’.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-69 Flight Plan Export
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear when a flight plan is imported or exported.
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
‘File contained user waypoints only.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
User waypoints imported successfully.
These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
No stored flight plan data was modified.’ stored in the system have been modified.
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
One or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’ The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can
support. The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints the system cannot
locked.’
find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be
edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
loaded.’
user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
system before it can be activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’ One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to
naming conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan contains invalid waypoint(s)’
One or more imported flight plan waypoints is/are invalid or locked (this may occur if
waypoints in the flight plan were removed in a recent database cycle). The imported
flight plan can be deleted or it can be viewed and edited to remove invalid waypoints
prior to use.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card
may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-9 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select OK.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight CANCEL and
press the ENT Key.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned off, overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. Additionally, the system allows the pilot to delete the active flight plan. Deleting the active flight
plan suspends navigation by the system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
STORED FLIGHT PLAN FUNCTIONS
INDEX
APPENDICES
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. Details about each stored flight plan
can be viewed on the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page and on the FPL – STORED FLIGHT PLAN Page.
A stored flight plan may be viewed or edited. The system also allows copying a flight plan into a new
flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to
duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Lastly, individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Flight Plan
EIS
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Departure Airport
– Destination Airport
– Total Flight Plan Distance
– Enroute Safe Altitude
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
3) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) Information is displayed in the FLIGHT PLAN INFO Box showing departure, destination, total distance, and
enroute safe altitude information for the selected Flight Plan.
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the FPL – STORED FLIGHT PLAN Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
AFCS
6) Push the FMS Knob to exit the FPL – STORED FLIGHT PLAN Page
Storing an active flight plan from the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page or the FLIGHT PLAN Window:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight plan
list on the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight CANCEL and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight CANCEL and
press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4)
With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
EIS
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the FPL – FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG Page.
3) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The FPL –
STORED FLIGHT PLAN Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
AFCS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EIS
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and terminal
phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to
waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear
deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
CNCL VNV Softkey
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-71 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE Box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
INDEX
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
228
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EIS
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV ¯ Softkey on the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN Page allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV
direct-to waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from
current position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to
with altitude constraint activated by pressing the ¯ Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
After VNV Direct-to
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VNV PROF Softkey
VNV ¯ Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-72 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
APPENDICES
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
INDEX
3) Press the VNV ¯ Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV ¯’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Activate
vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
EIS
4) PUSH the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Large White Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Large Cyan Text
Small Cyan Text
AFCS
Small Cyan Subdued Text
Small White Text with Altitude
Restriction Bar
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Constraint Examples
APPENDICES
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Figure 5-73 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
INDEX
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a procedure is loaded, the system will auto-designate (automatically enter and enable) altitude
constraints to be used for vertical guidance. An altitude constraint which has been auto-designated by the
system will be displayed as cyan text.
An altitude constraint may be manually designated for procedure waypoints and enroute waypoints by
activating and moving the cursor to the desired altitude in the active flight plan, turning the small FMS Knob
and pressing the ENT Key. An altitude constraint may be manually designated only if it is available for vertical
guidance. Altitudes that are not available for vertical guidance are shown in white text and cannot be selected
by the cursor.
For all designated altitudes, the system will automatically calculate advisory altitudes prior to the designated
altitude constraint. These advisory altitudes are not auto-designated and are displayed as white text.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated”. Pressing the CLR
Key with the altitude constraint highlighted in the active flight plan removes the altitude constraint designation.
The altitude will not be used for vertical guidance and the text displayed will be shown in white. The system
will recalculate advisory altitudes (white text) once any altitude constraint is designated, modified, or undesignated.
An altitude constraint may be entered as a flight level (FL), height above mean sea level (MSL), or height
above ground level (AGL). AGL format is only available for airport waypoints.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
-- Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
-- Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
-- The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
-- The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
-- The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
-- The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Altitude constraints can be modified or removed after having been added to the flight plan. If an altitude
constraint is removed and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint,
the system will display that altitude restriction in white text. The system also provides a way to reinstate a
published altitude constraint that has been modified.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Entering/designating or modifying an altitude constraint:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
APPENDICES
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an aerodrome without a runway
selected, an additional choice is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose MSL or AGL, and press the ENT
Key to accept the altitude.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering/designating or modifying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob and enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the constraint. If the selected waypoint is an aerodrome without a runway selected,
an additional choice is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose MSL or AGL, and press the ENT Key to
accept the altitude.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint.
Removing/undesignating an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Push the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select OK and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Select ‘Revert’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
PROC Key.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘2000ft’, that indicates a leg that
terminates when the specified altitude (2000 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan displays
‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate sequencing to
the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
AFCS
Figure 5-74 Procedure Leg Identifiers
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page (INFO-1 Softkey):
APPENDICES
Press the DP Softkey. The WPT – DEPARTURE INFORMATION Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport
displayed on the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page.
Or:
Press the STAR Softkey. The WPT – ARRIVAL INFORMATION Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page.
Or:
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Press the APR Softkey. The WPT – APPROACH INFORMATION Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport
displayed on the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION Page.
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the map.
6) Repeat Step 5, until desired information has been viewed for the chosen procedure.
EIS
7) Press the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey to return to the WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION PAGE.
DEPARTURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The PROCEDURES Window is displayed.
2) Highlight SELECT DEPARTURE.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The PROC – DEPARTURE LOADING Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. LOAD? is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Available Procedure Actions
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Departure Preview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures
Departure Choices
Selected Departure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-75 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
APPENDICES
Figure 5-76 Departure Loading
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight CANCEL and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Push the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active flight
plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The PROCEDURES Window is displayed.
2) Highlight SELECT ARRIVAL.
3) Press the ENT Key. The PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING Page is displayed.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. LOAD? is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Available Procedure Options
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Arrival Preview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Choices
Selected Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-77 Arrival Selection
Loaded Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-78 Arrival Loading
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key.
EIS
2) Push the FMS Knob (not required on the PFD), and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight CANCEL and press the ENT
Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPROACHES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system can provide navigation guidance for GPS and NAVAID instrument approach procedures. This
section will discuss loading, activating, and removing approaches designated for navigation. For information
on changing the navigation source of the CDI, and for information on the display of vertical guidance on the
PFD, see the Flight Instruments Section. See the Audio Panel & CNS Section for information on selecting and
tuning a NAV receiver.
INSTRUMENT APPROACH
AFCS
The system provides guidance for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published
instrument approach procedures. Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach
is loaded when another approach is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous
approach. The route is defined by selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When flying Direct-to the Final Approach Fix (FAF), the system will suspend (SUSP) leg sequencing
if the approach intercept angel exceeds 45 degrees.
NOTE: When Vectors to Final is selected, the system will display an extended centerline, but guidance is not
provided to the Final Approach Course.
APPENDICES
Approaches using GPS
INDEX
RNAV/GPS approach procedures require GPS and can be selected for use. When an approach procedure
lists ‘gps’ after a NAVAID prefix, (such as ‘VORgps 17L’), this indicates the procedure is an Overlay Approach.
The procedure may be flown either as a conventional, ground-based approach procedure or may be flown
with the GPS.
Refer to the current, pertinent flight manual and regulations for information on alternatively using GPS
navigation for NAVAID exclusive approaches.
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The system will allow the applicable level of service for the chosen approach using GPS navigation. See
the following table for approach service levels allowed by the system:
Description
Example on HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HSI Annunciation
LNAV
Approach to the published MDA
LP
LNAV+V
Approach with advisory vertical
guidance to the published MDA
LP+V
Approach with approved vertical
guidance to the published DA
LPV
EIS
L/VNAV
Approach Service Level
– LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-10 Approach Service Levels
The system GPS receivers will use Satellite Based Augmentation (SBAS) when available. Some approaches
require the use of SBAS for lateral and/or vertical GPS navigation. For information on how lateral and
vertical guidance is depicted on the PFD, see the Flight Instruments Section.
GPS
N/A
LNAV+V
GPS
GPS
(advisory only)
LNAV/VNAV
GPS
GPS*
LP
GPS*
N/A
LP+V
GPS*
GPS*
(advisory only)
LPV
GPS*
GPS*
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LNAV
AFCS
Vertical Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lateral Navigation Source
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Service Level
* SBAS required
APPENDICES
Table 5-11 Source of Lateral and Vertical Navigation per Approach Service Level
Loss of SBAS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Due to the high level of precision required by some approach service levels, losing SBAS may require
the pilot to acknowledge a downgrade of approach service level, or to abort the approach. See the
following table for approach degradation behavior:
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the current, pertinent flight manual for additional information regarding crew responses for
loss of SBAS and approach downgrade procedures.
Approach
LNAV
SBAS Becomes
Unavailable
Description
Approach phase SBAS not required.
not specified The approach is continued.
None
N/A
None
N/A
None
LNAV*
None
N/A
Acknowledge
message to redisplay
CDI with LNAV
LNAV*
At/after the FAF CDI is removed **
Abort
N/A
More than 1 min HSI displays amber LP+V;
prior to the FAF VDI displays NO GP.
None
N/A
Acknowledge
message to redisplay
CDI with LNAV
LNAV*
CDI is removed;
VDI displays NO GP. **
Abort
N/A
More than 1 min
HSI displays amber LPV
prior to the FAF
None
N/A
Within 1 min
prior to the FAF HSI displays magenta LNAV;
VDI displays NO GP.
At/after the FAF
None
LNAV*
EIS
LNAV+V Prior to the FAF HSI displays amber L/VNAV;
VDI displays NO GP. **
LNAV/
HSI displays magenta LNAV;
VNAV At/after the FAF
VDI displays NO GP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
More than 1 min
HSI displays amber LP
prior to the FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LP+V
Within 1 min HSI displays magenta LNAV;
prior to the FAF CDI is removed. **
HSI displays magenta LNAV;
Within 1 min
CDI is removed.
prior to the FAF
VDI displays NO GP. **
At/after the FAF
AFCS
LPV
Action Required Downgrade
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* If there are no LNAV minimums available for the approach, abort.
** System message is generated.
Table 5-12 Approach Degradation Behavior
Loss of GPS
INDEX
APPENDICES
When GPS sensors are no longer being utilized for position fixing while on a GPS approach, the
approach must be aborted. When a loss of GPS occurs during a GPS approach, the HSI will no longer
display the CDI deviation bar, the approach indication will display an amber LNAV, and the system
message ABORT APR will be displayed. Once the pilot acknowledges the message, the HSI flight phase
will change and the CDI deviation bar will reappear. Reference the Abnormal Operations in later in this
section for more information on loss of GPS.
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH SELECTION AND REMOVAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either ‘Load’ or ‘Activate’ is given. ‘Load’ adds the approach
to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued
navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for
quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately
begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to load the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-To – Final’ —
which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The popup message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ will be generated when selecting a NAVAID exclusive
approach. This message is intended for localizer-based approaches. Refer to the current flight manual and
applicable regulations for information on approach navigation requirements.
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If there is no arrival procedure in the active flight plan, loading an approach to a flight plan in which
the destination airport has already been entered, will result in the previously entered destination airport
followed by the newly loaded approach.
Destination Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Approach Preview
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loaded Procedures
Approach Choices
Figure 5-79 Approach Selection
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page
Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-80 Approach Loading
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The PROCEDURES Window is displayed.
2) Highlight SELECT APPROACH, and press the ENT Key. The PROC – APPROACH LOADING Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AFCS
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the CHANNEL Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums
APPENDICES
a) To set approach minimums, turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO or TEMP COMP and press the ENT
Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If TEMP COMP was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
the temperature (as reported at the destination airport), and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, select OFF and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key with LOAD? highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ACTIVATE and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
When selecting a NAVAID exclusive approach, the popup message is displayed: ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS –
GPS guidance is for monitoring only. Load approach?’ With YES highlighted, press the ENT Key.
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Page:
1) Select the NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
PROC – APPROACH LOADING Page is displayed.
EIS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) To set MINIMUMS, turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO or TEMP COMP, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If TEMP COMP was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The LOAD? Field is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the ENT Key with LOAD? highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ACTIVATE and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated.
When selecting a NAVAID exclusive approach, the popup message is displayed: ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS –
GPS guidance is for monitoring only. Load approach?’ With YES highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
AFCS
1) Press the PROC Key. The PROCEDURES Window is displayed with ACTIVATE APPROACH highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PROC Key to display the PROCEDURES Window.
2) Highlight ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
APPENDICES
1) From the PROC – APPROACH LOADING Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load &
Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key.
When selecting a NAVAID exclusive approach, the popup message is displayed: ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS –
GPS guidance is for monitoring only. Load approach?’ With YES highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key.
EIS
2) Push the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight CANCEL and press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system is capable of providing guidance for the approach as well as the missed approach. Once the
missed approach is activated, MAPR will be displayed on the HSI next to the CDI. If the missed approach is
activated prior to the Missed Approach Point (MAP), waypoint sequencing will continue along the approach
to the missed approach. If the missed approach is not activated prior to the MAP, the system will enter SUSP
Mode once the aircraft crosses the MAP until the missed approach is activated or SUSP Mode is disabled. See
the Flight Instruments, Course Deviation Indicator section for more information on SUSP Mode.
In the missed approach procedure shown in the following figure, the altitude immediately following the
MAP is not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the
aircraft along the runway centerline until the required altitude required to safely make the first turn toward
the MAHP is exceeded. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude after crossing the
MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until the altitude is reached. After
reaching the altitude, a direct-to is established to the next published waypoint. If the aircraft altitude is above
the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix to begin the missed
approach procedure.
See the Using Map Displays, Map Symbols discussion previously given in this section for information on
displaying the missed approach preview on the navigation map.
244
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Course to Altitude Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-81 Course to Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, the procedure dictates a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would be appear in the list of waypoints as “(5500)”. Again, if
the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established on a
Course to Altitude leg when the missed approach procedure is activated.
Prior to the MAP, the lateral navigation is provided to the MAP before executing the missed approach.
Otherwise, the aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
Press the Go-Around Button.
Or:
AFCS
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Or:
1) Press the PROC Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION
Temperature Compensation for approach altitudes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can calculate temperature compensation for waypoint crossing altitudes loaded as
part of an approach procedure. The pilot must manually enable temperature compensation and then enter
the destination airport temperature. The system adjusts the altitudes accordingly, and the text for those
altitudes is displayed as slanted text.
Manually enabling temperature compensation for approach waypoint altitudes:
EIS
1) From the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page, press the MENU Key. The PAGE MENU Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed with the temperature highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to change the ‘TEMP AT <airport>’ Field. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. ACTIVATE COMPENSATION? is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
Canceling temperature compensation for approach waypoint altitudes:
1) From the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page, press the MENU Key. The PAGE MENU Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. CANCEL COMPENSATION? is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
NOTE: Activating/canceling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Regardless of when the destination temperature setting is entered (when enabling temperature
compensation for approach waypoint altitudes, or when enabling temperature compensation for approach
minimums), the system will use the same temperature setting for all temperature compensation calculations.
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-82 Temperature Compensation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-83 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Temperature Compensation for Approach Minimums
A temperature compensated minimum descent altitude can be entered for the approach. Once this is
entered, the altitude is also displayed on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Entering a temperature compensated minimum into an approach:
1) From the FPL – ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page, press the PROC Key. The PROCEDURES Window is displayed.
2) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SELECT APPROACH. Press the ENT Key.
3) If necessary, use the FMS Knob and the ENT Key to select the desired airport, approach, and transition.
EIS
4) Use the FMS Knob to place the flashing cursor in the MINIMUMS Box. Turn the small FMS Knob to select TEMP
COMP. Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the minimums altitude. Press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘TEMP
AT <destination airport>’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the temperature at the destination. Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key with either LOAD? or ACTIVATE? highlighted. The approach is added to the active flight plan,
and the temperature compensated minimums are displayed on the PFD.
Approach
minimum
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Temperature at
destination
APPENDICES
PROC – APPROACH LOADING Page
COMP MIN Shown on PFD
Temperature
Compensated
Minimum
INDEX
Figure 5-84 Entering Temp Comp Minimums
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 WEIGHT AND FUEL
WEIGHT AND FUEL PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of weight and fuel planning values is done on the
AUX - WEIGHT AND FUEL PLANNING Page. This page is displayed once power is applied to the system
and after acknowledging the MFD start-up screen, and it can be accessed any time from the AUX page group
(WEIGHT PLANNING).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Payload Calculator
EIS
NOTE: Estimated landing weight and fuel can only be calculated when a destination airport is entered and
airspeed is 30 knots or faster. Otherwise, Estimated Landing Weight, Estimated Landing Fuel, and Excess
Fuel cannot be calculated by the system and dashes for those fields are displayed.
Fuel Weight Calculator
Basic Empty Weight Entry
Pilot & Stores Weight Entry
Basic Operating Weight Calc.
Passenger(s) Weight Entry
Cargo Weight Entry
Zero Fuel Weight Calculation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Zero Fuel Weight Calculation
Aircraft Weight Calculation
Est. Landing Weight Calculation
Estimated Landing Fuel Calculation
Fuel Reserve Entry
Excess Fuel Calculation
Fuel Calculations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Fuel Remaining Fuel Used (since last sync) Total Fuel Range Time to Destination Fuel over Destination Total Fuel Endurance -
EMPTY WT Softkey
Figure 5-85 WEIGHT AND FUEL PLANNING Page
AFCS
(selects BASIC EMPTY
WEIGHT Field)
NOTE: All weight planning data is rounded to the nearest 10 pounds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Entering basic empty weight:
1) Press the EMPTY WT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Basic Empty Weight’, and press the ENT
Key.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the basic empty weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if desired.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering a pilot and stores weight:
1) To activate the cursor, push the FMS Knob. Highlight the PILOT AND STORES Field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the pilot and stores weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if desired.
The basic operating weight is calculated by adding the basic empty weight and the pilot and stores weight. The
total weight of passengers is calculated by multiplying the number of passengers by the average passenger weight.
EIS
Entering the number of passengers:
1) To activate the cursor, push the FMS Knob. Highlight the PASSENGERS # Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the number of passengers.
1) To activate the cursor, push the FMS Knob. Highlight the AT Field for passenger weight.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if desired.
Entering the average passenger weight:
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the average passenger weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if desired.
Zero fuel weight is calculated by adding together basic operating weight, passenger weight, and cargo.
Entering the cargo weight:
1) To activate the cursor, push the FMS Knob. Highlight the CARGO Field.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the cargo weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if desired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The total aircraft weight is calculated by adding the fuel on board to the zero fuel weight.
Entering a fuel on board weight:
1) To activate the cursor, push the FMS Knob. Highlight the FUEL ON BOARD Field.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel on board.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
INDEX
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if desired.
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering fuel reserve:
1) To activate the cursor, push the FMS Knob. Highlight the FUEL RESERVES Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves amount.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Push the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if desired.
Synchronizing the fuel on board with the actual measured fuel on board:
EIS
Select the FOB SYNC Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Synchronize Fuel on Board’, and press the
ENT Key. The actual measured fuel on board is displayed in the FUEL ON BOARD Field.
WEIGHT CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
-- Estimated fuel at landing weight
-- Excess fuel weight
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the AUX – TRIP
PLANNING Page.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
– FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
– Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
– Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
– Departure Time (local)
– Ground Speed
– Fuel Flow
– Fuel On Board Aircraft
– Calibrated Airspeed
– Indicated Altitude
– Barometric Pressure
– Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track –
Distance –
Est. Time Enroute –
Est. Time of Arrival –
Enroute Safe Altitude –
Sunrise Time (local) –
Sunset Time (local) –
Other Statistics
– Density Altitude
– True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
AFCS
Efficiency –
Total Endurance –
Remaining Fuel –
Remaining Endurance –
Fuel Required –
Total Range –
Softkeys
Figure 5-86 AUX – TRIP PLANNING Page
– Automatic/Manual Page Mode
– Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
-- Departure time (DEP TIME) – This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
-- Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) – The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
-- Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) – The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary
source of information is GPS altitude.
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (01-99), and the entire flight plan (CUM)
selected, the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (01-99), and a specific leg (numbered sequentially
in the flight plan) selected, the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (numbered sequentially
in the flight plan) selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the
endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
»» Desired Track – Desired Track is shown degrees and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It
is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
»» Distance – The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
»» Estimated time enroute (ETE) – ETE is shown as hours+minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
»» Estimated time of arrival (ETA) – ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
ƒƒ If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
ƒƒ If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ƒƒ If the active flight plan is selected, the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to and
including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg
of the flight plan was selected.
»» Enroute safe altitude (ESA) – The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT.
»» Destination sunrise and sunset times (Sunrise, Sunset) – These times are shown as hours:minutes of the
time at the destination.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
»» Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) – This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
»» Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) – This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained by
dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
»» Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) – This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
»» Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) – This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
»» Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) – This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel flow.
»» Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) – This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OTHER STATISTICS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
»» Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
»» True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/
WPTS selection).
Selected Flight Plan NN –
Selected Leg(s)
AFCS
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Starting and Ending Waypoint of Selected
Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
– CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
– NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
– REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
– NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-87 Trip Planning Page – Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
APPENDICES
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-88 Trip Planning Page – Waypoint Mode
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
From the AUX – TRIP PLANNING Page, press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU
Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
From the AUX – TRIP PLANNING Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) From the AUX – TRIP PLANNING Page, push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight CUM or REM. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the AUX – TRIP PLANNING Page, press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL Field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) From the AUX – TRIP PLANNING Page, press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page
Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME Field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT
Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until
all desired values have been entered.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DEAD RECKONING
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the
system uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when
available) to calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/
or heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated
position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the
aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or
airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly above and to the
right of the aircraft symbol. The CDI deviation bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes
in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.)
Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using
GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information. Profile View is not
available during DR Mode.
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, the terrain alerting system is disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Distance &
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-89 Dead Reckoning Mode – GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
257
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• Garmin GTX 345R Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather (Standard)
• L-3 WX-500 Stormscope Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (included with SVT option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• Skywatch SKY497 (TAS) (Optional)
• Garmin GTX 345R Automatic Dependent Surveillance- Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Standard)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
EIS
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional GDL 69/69A SXM is a remote-mounted satellite data link receiver which provides SiriusXM
Weather information. The system shows received graphical weather information and associated text on the Multi
Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A SXM can also receive
SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio entertainment programming
operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout
North America.
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer service
the coded IDs unique to the installed data link receiver. The SiriusXM Weather service has a coded Data Radio
ID. The Data Radio ID must be provided to activate the weather service. This ID is in the following locations:
-- The AUX - XM INFORMATION Page on the MFD
-- The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
-- The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to provide weather data and/
or audio entertainment programming provided through the data link receiver.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Press the INFO Softkey to display the AUX - XM INFORMATION Page.
APPENDICES
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
INDEX
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and desired weather product subscription package.
260
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating the SiriusXM Weather service:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Press the INFO Softkey to display the AUX - XM INFORMATION Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Observe the list of Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather product; a
green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several minutes
for weather products in the chosen subscription package to become available.
4) When the available weather products displayed match the weather products offered in the chosen SiriusXM
Weather product subscription package, press the LOCK Softkey.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
6) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Audio Radio ID
(for Satellite
Radio)
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather Products
(Available
Products for
Service Class
Indicated in
Green)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-1 AUX - XM INFORMATION Page
AFCS
Select to Display XM
Information page
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
The principal map page for viewing SiriusXM Weather data is the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
in the Map Page Group. Most SiriusXM Weather products can be shown on this page.
APPENDICES
Viewing the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
3) If the page title contains ‘CNXT’, it will be necessary to change the data link weather source from Garmin
Connext to SiriusXM Weather. Refer to the next procedure to change the source.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing the weather data link source (SiriusXM or Garmin Connext or FIS-B):
1) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) If necessary, turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B) Page.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’ or ‘Display Connext Weather’ and press
the ENT Key. Weather Data Link Page title and softkeys change to correspond to selected data link weather
source.
EIS
SiriusXM is the Active Data
Link Weather Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Symbol
and Ages (U.S. and
Canada)
AFCS
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product.
The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the weather product,
which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals. If for any reason, a product
is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals, the system removes the expired data from the display,
and shows dashes instead of the product age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what
is currently being transmitted by the SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has
elapsed, the color of the product age changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system
displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather product symbol instead of the product age.
The following table shows the weather product symbols, and the expiration times. SiriusXM and its weather
data suppliers define and control the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
30
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
60
Meteorological Aerodrome Report (METARs)
90
City Forecast (CITY)
90
Surface Analysis (SFC)
60
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
120
Winds Aloft (WIND)
90
County Warnings (COUNTY)
60
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
60
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) (ICNG)
90
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
90
Air Report (AIREPs)
90
Turbulence (TURB)
180
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports (TAFs)
no product image
30
no product image
60
60
APPENDICES
30
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
AFCS
30
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
60
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
EIS
30
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar (NEXRAD)
No Radar Coverage
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
MAP - NAVIGATION
MAP Page
MAP - WEATHER DATA
LINK (XM) Page
AUX - TRIP PLANNING
Page
Nearest Page Group
Flight Plan Pages
NEXRAD
+
+
+
+
+
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
+
+
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SiriusXM Weather Product
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR
+
+
AFCS
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WPT - WEATHER
INFORMATION Page
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol)
on specific maps.
+*
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
AIREPs
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
TFRs
TAFs
+
+
+
+
* Winds Aloft data on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page available inside the Profile View Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map. When
a weather product is selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the
product is enabled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying SiriusXM Weather products on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
2) If the PFD Inset Map is showing the traffic map, press the TFRC-2 Softkey to display the navigation map.
3) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of SiriusXM Weather products on the
Inset Map.
EIS
4) To display or remove the weather product icon and age box for displayed weather products on the inset map,
press the WX LGND Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The setup menus for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page and the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
control the map range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map
range larger than the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from
the map. The menus also provide the ability to enable/disable the display of weather products, and provide the
equivalent to using the softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting up and customizing the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, maximum map range settings,
etc.).
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page with the changed
settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Restoring default MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page settings:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
Maps besides the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page use settings based on those selected for the
MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing weather data for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, maximum map range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the MAP - WEATHER DATA
LINK (XM) Page and on most MFD pages displaying a navigation map.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page):
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the XM Weather Legends Window, Press the LEGEND Softkey, or press the ENT or the CLR Keys, or
push the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page):
AFCS
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more SiriusXM Weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, Press the LEGEND Softkey, or press the ENT or the CLR Keys, or push the FMS
Knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
-- Echo Tops
-- County Warnings
-- Cloud Tops
-- TFRs
-- Cell Movement
-- AIREPs
-- SIGMETs
-- PIREPs
-- AIRMETs
-- METARs
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The map panning feature is enabled by pushing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information
about Item
Selected with
Map Pointer
Available
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TFR Selected with
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-3 Panning on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
NEXRAD
AFCS
NOTE: NEXRAD cannot be displayed simultaneously with terrain, echo tops, turbulence, or airborne weather
radar data on the same map.
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated refresh time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar synopsis and may not
depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
The system displays either base or composite NEXRAD imagery, depending on the model of data link
receiver installed.
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD wether product shows a composite reflectivity image. It
represents the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type or precipitation, if known.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 NEXRAD Data on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
All weather product legends can be viewed on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page. For the
NEXRAD legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for display.
No Radar Coverage
INDEX
Figure 6-5 NEXRAD Data with Legend
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of no radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is enabled. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information are not currently available or are not being
collected are indicated in gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reflectivity
EIS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Limitations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
ƒƒ NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
ƒƒ NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
ƒƒ When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area.
ƒƒ Unknown precipitation occurring below 52ºN is displayed as rain, regardless of the actual precipitation
type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
269
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Block Area is 4 km2
Figure 6-6 NEXRAD Weather Product at a 30 NM Map Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
ƒƒ Ground clutter
ƒƒ Strobes and spurious radar data
ƒƒ Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
ƒƒ Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
ƒƒ Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
ƒƒNEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
ƒƒ Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
ƒƒ Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed regardless of actual precipitation
type.
ƒƒ Below 52ºN, if the type of precipitation is unavailable, the system displays the precipitation using the
color codes associated with rain.
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
No Coverage
Above 55ºN
Precipitation
Above 52ºN
Displays as Mixed
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-7 NEXRAD Data - Canada
ECHO TOPS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data on the
MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-8 Echo Tops Weather Product
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
EIS
To display the Echo Tops legend, select the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for display. Since
Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather products
is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is enabled on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page, the
system disables the NEXRAD and Cloud Tops weather products.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-9 Echo Tops Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is enabled. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
CLOUD TOPS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK
(XM) Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
Figure 6-10 Cloud Tops Weather Product
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Cloud Tops legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for display.
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM)
Page, the system disables the Echo Tops weather product.
EIS
Figure 6-11 Cloud Tops Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: SiriusXM Lightning data cannot be displayed at the same time as optional WX-500 Stormscope
lightning is selected for display.
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location
of the lightning strike is not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Lightning
Strikes
APPENDICES
Figure 6-12 SiriusXM Lightning Data
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page).
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
To display the SiriusXM Lightning legend on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page, select the
LEGEND Softkey when SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
EIS
Figure 6-13 Lightning Legend
CELL MOVEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Storm Cells
Figure 6-14 Cell Movement Data
INDEX
APPENDICES
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement appears when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled. On the
MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently from NEXRAD.
Cell Movement data can be displayed on the following maps:
»» PFD Inset Map
»» AUX - TRIP PLANNING Page
»» MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
»» Nearest Pages
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69A SXM data link receiver is installed. In this
case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the MAP
- WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
EIS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page). For Cell
Movement to be displayed on maps other than the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page, Cell Movement
must be enabled in the Navigation Map Setup Menu (see the procedure ‘Setting up and customizing weather
data for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page’).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To display the Cell Movement legend on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page, press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-15 Cell Movement Legend
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The National Weather Service (NWS) issues SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and
AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) for potentially hazardous weather. The NWS issues
Convective SIGMETs for hazardous convective weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A
localized SIGMET indicates a SIGMET affecting a small geographic area.
AFCS
Airmet
Turbulence
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AIRMET
IFR
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-16 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If a 69A SXM receiver installed, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless
at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
EIS
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, push the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend , press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and AIRMETs are
selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-17 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-18 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
METARS AND TAFS
AFCS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud base heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an
airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and
other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-19 METAR Flags on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by its original text. The original text may contain information not found in the
decoded version. The system displays TAF information only in its original form, when a TAF is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
AFCS
2) Push the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Select the WPT - WEATHER INFORMATION Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. The METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METAR data for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-20 METAR and TAF Text on the WPT - WEATHER INFORMATION Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page:
1) Select the FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page on the MFD.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT
PLAN Page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the METAR legend on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page, push the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are enabled for display.
Information in the METAR text determines the color of the METAR flag. A gray METAR flag appears for
a reporting station when its METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR
category (e.g. VFR, IFR).
INDEX
Figure 6-21 METAR Legend
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed navigation database
coverage area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-22 Current Surface Analysis and City Forecast Weather Products
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
AFCS
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC (12, 24, 36, 48, OFF) Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend, push the LEGEND Softkey when the Surface
Analysis and City Forecast weather product is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-23 Surface Analysis Legend
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FREEZING LEVELS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data will appear when
it becomes available.
Figure 6-24 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-25 Freezing Level Legend
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the predicted wind speed and direction at the surface and at
selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND (Softkey changes based on selected altitude) Softkey.
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-26 Winds Aloft Weather Product at 9,000 Feet
To display the Winds Aloft legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-27 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the optional Profile View feature on the MAP
- NAVIGATION MAP Page. The displayed wind components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track,
but not to aircraft speed.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Profile View Path
Enabled
Wind Component Velocity
and Direction Arrows
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-28 Winds Aloft Data Inside Profile View (MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page)
Headwind Symbol
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in the following table.
5 knots
10 knots
AFCS
50 knots
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page. This behavior can be changed on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
EIS
7) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COUNTY WARNINGS
The County Warnings weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings
from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
and flood conditions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Selected
Flood
Warning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-29 County Warning Weather Product
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To display the County Warnings legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings are selected
to be displayed.
Figure 6-30 County Warnings Legend
CYCLONE
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
DD/HH:MM.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cyclone
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-31 Cyclone Data with Projected Track
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available unless at
least one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
EIS
To display the Cyclone legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-32 Cyclone Legend
ICING (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data is selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the icing environment. Icing severity is displayed
in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type). The CIP product is not
a forecast, but a presentation of the conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors. SLD conditions may be extremely hazardous to all aircraft.
Displaying Icing data:
AFCS
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG (Softkey changes based on selection) Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Icing
Potential
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SLD Threat
Figure 6-33 Icing Data at 6,000 Feet
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display the Icing Potential legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-34 Icing Potential Legend
TURBULENCE
AFCS
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time the NEXRAD weather product is selected for
display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the TURB (Softkey changes based on selection) Softkey.
INDEX
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Severe
Turbulence
Moderate
Turbulence
EIS
Light
Turbulence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-35 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
To display the Turbulence legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-36 Turbulence Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
AFCS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather conditions encountered by pilots. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit
PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions,
windshear, turbulence, and type of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Routine
PIREP
Selected
AIREP
EIS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP and
AIREP Text
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Urgent
PIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-37 AIREPs/PIREPs on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Push the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle appears around the weather report
when it is selected.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The WPT - WEATHER INFORMATION Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is
first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional
information not present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page.
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Age of report in HH:MM
Decoded PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
Original PIREP Text
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-38 PIREP Text on the MAP- WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend, press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are selected
for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-39 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TFRS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
EIS
In the United States, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs) to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons
including national security, law enforcement, fire suppression, natural disasters., airshows, and large sporting
events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed is only intended to supplement official TFR
information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TFR Summary
Information
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-40 TFR Data on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) Page or MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Push the Joystick and pan the map pointer to highlight a TFR border. The system displays TFR summary
information for the highlighted TFR above the map.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
INDEX
5) Push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-41 Full Text for Selected TFR
EIS
The setup menus for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page control the map range settings above which TFR
data is decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected,
the TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page use settings based on those selected for the MAP NAVIGATION MAP Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product maximum map range setting.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (range settings or ‘Off’ to disable display of TFRs).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 FIS-B WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of
hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict
current weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GTX 345R is a Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). It receives Flight Information Services - Broadcast
(FIS-B) weather data from a network of UAT ground-based transceivers (GBTs). The system displays FIS-B
graphical weather information and associated text on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight
Display (PFD) Inset Map.
FIS-B weather data reception requires the aircraft be within range and line-of-sight of an operating GBT
broadcasting FIS-B weather data. Reception may be affected by factors including altitude and terrain.
Reception of FIS-B weather data occurs automatically without any pilot action. FIS-B broadcasts provide
weather data in a repeating cycle which may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather
data. Therefore, not all available weather data may be available immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition.
USING FIS-B WEATHER PRODUCTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The primary map for viewing FIS-B Weather data is the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page in the
Map Page Group.
Viewing the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B, XM, or CNXT) Page.
3) If the page title displays a weather data link weather source other than ‘FIS-B’, such as ‘XM’ or ‘CNXT’, proceed
to the following steps to change the data link weather source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ and press the ENT Key. The page title will display
‘MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B)’ to indicate FIS-B is now the selected data link weather source.
APPENDICES
On the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature,
which includes all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather
Product Age
Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-42 MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a FIS-B weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed on the screen to the right
of the product symbol. The age of the product is based on the time difference between when the data was
assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are transmitted at specific intervals.
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time intervals, the data is
considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures the displayed data is consistent with FIS-B
broadcast data. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age displayed
changes to amber. The system displays dashes instead of a product age when a product has expired. If a
weather product is not available or has not been received, the system displays ‘N/A’ instead of a product age.
The following table shows the FIS-B weather product symbols, the expiration times, and broadcast rates. The
broadcast rate represents the interval at which FIS-B GBTs broadcast new signals that may or may not contain
new weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received
by the UAT.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs
90
EIS
Table 6-4 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map shows the
weather product softkeys for the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page). When a weather product is
enabled for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray.
Maps besides the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page use settings based on those selected for the
MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting up and customizing FIS-B weather data for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The setup menus for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page and the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page
control the map range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map
range larger than the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from
the map. The menus also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather
products.
APPENDICES
Setting up and customizing the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’, and press the ENT Key.
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page with the changed
settings.
Restoring default MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If restoring an individual weather product setting to its default value, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired field to restore.
6) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the large FMS Knob if needed to highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ (to restore only the highlighted field)
or ‘Restore All Defaults’ (to restore all products within the selected product group to their default settings), and
press the ENT Key.
If multiple data link weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in the following table will result in identical settings for all services.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FIS-B Weather Product
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar Coverage
AFCS
Not Available
Not Available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Not Available
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
APPENDICES
SiriusXM Weather Product
and Softkey
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar
Coverage
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Not Available
Not Available
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Table 6-5 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple
Weather Data Link Sources
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When a FIS-B weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product information
box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
EIS
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the MAP - WEATHER DATA
LINK (FIS-B) Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page for
active FIS-B weather products displayed on that page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more FIS-B weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Additional information about METARs, SIGMETs, AIRMETs, PIREPs, and TFRs can be selected by using the
Map Pointer to pan to the desired information on the map.
The map panning feature is enabled by pushing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-43 METAR Flags on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
297
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). The pilot can choose which type of NEXRAD weather product is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
AFCS
Figure 6-44 NEXRAD Weather on MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page
3) To display the regional version of the NEXRAD weather product, press the US Softkey. Softkey becomes the
RGNL Softkey.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product:
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey. This softkey becomes the US Softkey. A mosaic of NEXRAD data for the continental
United States (CONUS) is displayed.
4) To remove the NEXRAD weather product, press the RGNL Softkey. Softkey becomes the NEXRAD Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white hashed boundary
rectangle encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed.
The system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
No Radar
Coverage
Boundary of FIS-B
Regional NEXRAD
Product
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-45 Regional NEXRAD on MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, press the LEGEND Softkey
when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage
(Inside Coverage
Boundary)
Boundary of Regional Radar
Coverage Area
Figure 6-46 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
APPENDICES
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Reflectivity
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD Limitations
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
ƒƒ At a map range of 30 nm or less, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the
regional version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide.
ƒƒ The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
ƒƒ Preciptiation occuring below the radar beam will not be detected.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
ƒƒ Ground clutter
ƒƒ Strobes and spurious radar data
ƒƒ Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
ƒƒ Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
ƒƒ Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system will begin to display METAR flags as it receives reports; however it may take approximately
ten minutes for all available METAR and TAF data to be received over a FIS-B broadcast.
EIS
Aviation Routine Weather Reports or METARs typically contain current information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect routine hourly observations. An Aviation Selected Special Report or SPECI includes
the code “SPECI” in the report, and may be issued if critical information has changed after the issuance of a
METAR. The system displays colored flags at airports with report(s) available.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-47 METAR Flags on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are predications of expected weather conditions for an area within
five statute miles of the center of an airport’s runway complex. The National Weather Service issues scheduled
TAFs four times each day, and additional amended TAFs if conditions warrant. TAFs typically span a forecast
period of 24 hours, but may be scheduled for a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility,
significant weather phenomena, and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are available on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, appears only in its original text.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the WPT - WEATHER INFORMATION Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the WPT - WEATHER INFORMATION Page.
2) Push the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. The METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
METAR Symbol
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-48 METAR and TAF Text on the WPT - WEATHER INFORMATION Page
INDEX
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an offroute METAR is available near the waypoint.
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying original METAR text on the FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page:
1) Select the FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page on the MFD.
2) Push the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) Page, press the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the METAR text does not contain enough information to determine the METAR category
(e.g., VFR, IFR).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-49 METAR Legend
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page. This behavior can be changed on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Viewing FIS-B status:
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the AUX - ADS-B STATUS
Page.
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B STATUS Page.
Figure 6-50 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on AUX - ADS-B STATUS Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUX - ADS-B STATUS
Page Item
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
APPENDICES
Weather Products:
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
REGIONAL NEXRAD
TAF
Status
Message
ENABLED
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
Description
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather
products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No data received from the GTX 345R UAT.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
NOT AVAILABLE FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is
not receiving the FIS-B weather service.
AWAITING DATA The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
INDEX
Table 6-6 AUX - ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis
for hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display
inaccurate or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system
manufacturer for detailed information about the system.
EIS
NOTE: The optional L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® system is not intended for hazardous thunderstorm
penetration. Weather information on the G1000 MFD is approved for weather avoidance only. Refer to the
WX-500 User’s Guide for a detailed description of Stormscope operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Stormscope Lightning cannot be displayed at the same time as data link lightning products from
SiriusXM or Garmin Connext Weather.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby
thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of
two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
AFCS
Lightning Age
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• PFD Inset Map
• AUX - TRIP PLANNING Page
• MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page
• Nearest Pages
• MAP - NAVIGATION MAP
The MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page is the principal page for viewing Stormscope data. Stormscope data can be
displayed on other map pages as an additional reference. To display Stormscope data on any map besides the
MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page, press the MAP Softkey (or the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map), then press
the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the yellow lightning strike symbology
shown in the following table.
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
APPENDICES
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Table 6-7 Lightning Age and Symbols
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
EIS
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following Stormscope options are available:
»» STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
»» STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
»» STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
On the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity. Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Push the FMS knob to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-51 MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn.
This is to ensure the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North Up orientation) on the
MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page. However, in Track Up orientation at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope
lightning data can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for
Stormscope data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North
Up orientation shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present.
The maximum zoom range can also be set on the Navigation Map. Note that Stormscope data above the
selected maximum zoom range is decluttered.
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select ‘Map Setup’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Push the FMS Knob to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To change the display range on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom
out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
3) To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-52 MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page
AFCS
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Select the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options.
INDEX
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This is
to ensure the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Manually clearing Stormscope data:
1) Select the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Clear Lightning Data’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Select the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
EIS
2) Press the CLEAR Softkey.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚ viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
Or:
1) Select the MAP - STORMSCOPE® Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘View Arc’ and ‘View 360˚ options.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) When an item is selected, press the ENT Key.
310
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed if the aircraft is outside of the terrain database coverage area.
NOTE: The optional Terrain-SVS or TAWS-B systems will take precedence over Terrain Proximity.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It
increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain
Proximity with a Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and
it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice alerts. It only
provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from
the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated
algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page is the principal page for viewing terrain and obstacle information.
The system uses the symbols and colors in the following figure and table to represent obstacles and aircraft
altitude on the MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to represent
terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the altitude of the
aircraft.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
EIS
100 ft Threshold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the Terrain Proxmity Page only, a gray shade of purple indicates no terrain data is
available.
Figure 6-53 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle* is more than 1000 ft below
aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* Gray obstacles not shown on the Terrain Proximity‑ Page.
Table 6-8 Terrain Proximity Obstacle Colors and Symbology
INDEX
APPENDICES
Display of terrain and obstacle information is available as an additional reference on the following maps and
pages:
»» PFD Inset Map
»» Flight Plan Page
»» MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
»» Trip Planning Page
312
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown.
The MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/
disabling display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which
terrain and obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is
selected, the data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the
MFD, while the range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
Maps besides the MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page use settings based on those selected for the MAP NAVIGATION MAP Page. The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
AFCS
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
APPENDICES
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pushing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional Information
on Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Red Lighted Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-54 Terrain Information on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page is the principal page for showing terrain and obstacle data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other
NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
In addition to the terrain colors discussed previously, a gray shade of purple on the MAP - TERRAIN
PROXIMITY Page to represent areas where terrain database information is unavailable.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page.
APPENDICES
3) To change the view,
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/hiding aviation information on the MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within 100’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-55 MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within 100’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within 100’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Figure 6-56 MAP - TERRAIN PROXIMITY Page (ARC View)
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TERRAIN-SVS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Garmin SVS is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
EIS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed if the aircraft is outside of the terrain database coverage area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the Synthetic Vision System (SVS). If equipped with TAWS-B, the TAWS-B
option will take precedence over Terrain-SVS.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system available with the Synthetic Vision System (SVS). SVS functionality
is offered as an optional enhancement. Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) (if equipped)
or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within SVS to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence
of threatening terrain relevant to the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding SVS, refer to the
Synthetic Vision System (SVS) section of the Pilot’s Guide.
Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with TAWS-B. TAWS-B is more
sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays
are the same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
• Descent to 500 Feet Callout (DFC)
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to GSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
EIS
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL. Alerts are given relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically
as the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols shown in the figure and tables below are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-57 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
AFCS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle* is more than 1000 ft below
aircraft altitude
* Gray obstacles not shown on the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page.
APPENDICES
Table 6-9 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Potential Impact Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
Warning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Caution
Table 6-10 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
EIS
The MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page is the principal page for viewing terrain and obstacle information. In addition,
Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following pages and maps for reference:
-- PFD Inset Map
-- Flight Plan Pages
-- MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
-- AUX - TRIP PLANNING Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors is shown.
The MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/
disabling display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which
terrain and obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is
selected, the data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the
MFD, while the range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
Maps other than the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the MAP - NAVIGATION
MAP Page. The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made
for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below
20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP - TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in
relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs,
and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft
intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the Terrain-SVS Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft; the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings or arcs.
In addition to the terrain colors discussed previously, a gray shade of purple on the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page
to represent areas where terrain database information is unavailable.
EIS
Displaying the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page.
Changing the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page view:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’, dependent on current state, and press the ENT Key to change the view.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’, dependent on current state, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within 100’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-58 MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page (360 View)
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Above or Within 100’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Arc
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within 100’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Annunciation
Window
APPENDICES
Figure 6-59 MAP TERRAIN-SVS Page (ARC View)
Terrain-SVS Alerts
INDEX
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TerrainSVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the MFD pop-up
alert:
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
-- Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
-- Press the ENT Key (accesses the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Alert
Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD Pop-up Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-60 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Display Enabled
AFCS
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-61 MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS INHIBIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Use caution when inhibiting Terrain-SVS as the
system should be enabled when appropriate. When Terrain-SVS is inhibited, the alert annunciation ‘TER
INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the annunciation window on the MFD.
Figure 6-62 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled (Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
EIS
Inhibiting/enabling MAP - TERRAIN-SVS alerting:
1) Select the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain-SVS’ or ‘Enable Terrain-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT
Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint during a GPS SBAS
approach, a LOW ALT annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details. The following table shows Terrain-SVS alert types with corresponding annunciations and
aural messages.
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)
TERRAIN
WARNING - TERRAIN
TERRAIN
WARNING - TERRAIN
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
TERRAIN
WARNING - OBSTACLE
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning
(IOI)
TERRAIN
WARNING - OBSTACLE
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION - TERRAIN
TERRAIN
CAUTION - TERRAIN
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
TERRAIN
CAUTION - OBSTACLE
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution
(IOI)
TERRAIN
CAUTION - OBSTACLE
Alert Type
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
APPENDICES
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
Aural Message
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
INDEX
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in the following figure. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed
on the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page. The alert is
annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes
in the following figure.
EIS
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
700
600
500
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
400
300
200
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Required Terrain ClearanceClearance
(FT)
Minimum Terrain/Obstacle
(FT)
800
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance
From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-63 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
AFCS
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SYSTEM STATUS
During initialization, Terrain-SVS conducts a system test of its aural and visual annunciations. An aural alert
is issued at test completion.
Alert Type
System Test Pass
Terrain System Test Fail
Aural Message
TER TEST
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
TER FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
APPENDICES
System Test in Progress
PFD/MFD* Alert Annunciation
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
INDEX
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVS System Test Status Annunciations
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert, “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page. The voice alert,
“Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is within
the database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
EIS
Alert Cause
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable
or invalid. Terrain-SVS
operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid, invalid software
configuration, audio fault
No GPS position
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Out of database coverage
area
Aural Message
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
“Terrain System Failure”
TER FAIL
TER N/A
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
MAP - TERRAIN-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN FAIL
NO GPS POSITION
None
TER N/A
None
TER N/A
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when
GPS position returns
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when
sufficient GPS signal is received
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when
aircraft re-enters coverage area
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-13 Terrain-SVS Status Annunciations
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle information is not displayed if the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain
database coverage area.
EIS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) provides increased situational awareness and aids
in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual annunciations and voice alerts when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151b.
However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may be inaccurate.
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic
sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system uses GSL
altitude to determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject
to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not
require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore,
GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the system uses the GPS position and GSL altitude to calculate and “predict”
the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle conditions.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude shown on the MAP - TAWS-B Page.
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in the following figure and tables are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-64 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Gray obstacle* is more than 1000 ft below
aircraft altitude
* Gray obstacles not shown on the MAP - TAWS-B Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-14 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology
APPENDICES
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
Warning
PULL UP
Caution
TERRAIN
INDEX
Table 6-15 TAWS-B Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
-- PFD Inset Navigation Map
-- Flight Plan Pages
-- MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
-- System Pages
-- MAP - TAWS-B Page
-- AUX - TRIP PLANNING Page
TAWS-B relative terrain and obstacle information is also available for display in the optional Profile View
Window on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page. Refer to the Profile View Terrain discussion in this section for
more information.
EIS
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps except the MAP - TAWS-B Page or PFD Inset
Navigation Map):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
Displaying terrain and obstacle information on the PFD Inset Navigation Map:
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) If the PFD Inset Map is showing the traffic map, press the TFRC-2 Softkey to display the navigation map.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
The system displays a TAWS-B icon with the terrain legend when terrain and obstacles are enabled on MFD
maps. The legend appears without the terrain icon on the dedicated MAP - TAWS-B Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-65 TAWS-B Icon and Legend
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/
disabling display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which
terrain and obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If the crew selects a map range larger than the
selected map range setting, the data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function
applies only to the MFD, while the range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
Maps besides the MAP - TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP
Page. The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• TERRAIN DATA – Enables/disables display of terrain data and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
EIS
• OBSTACLE DATA – Enables/disables display off obstacle data and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
328
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MAP - TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map page for viewing
TAWS-B information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an
obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest
potential point of impact on the MAP - TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from one to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
In addition to the terrain colors discussed previously, a gray shade of purple on the MAP - TAWS-B Page to
represent areas where terrain database information is unavailable.
EIS
Displaying the MAP - TAWS-B Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - TAWS-B Page.
Changing the MAP - TAWS-B Page view:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
Showing/hiding aviation information on the MAP - TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within 100’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-66 MAP - TAWS-B Page
TAWS-B ALERTS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, the system provides visual annunciations and voice alerts. The following table shows TAWS-B alert
types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
-- Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
-- Press the ENT Key (accesses the MAP - TAWS-B Page)
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-67 TAWS-B PFD Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-68 MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
TAWS-B Pop-up Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
AFCS
Alert Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-69 MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
PFD/MFD†
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
PULL UP
PULL-UP
“Pull Up”
TERRAIN - PULL-UP
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull
Up”
PULL UP
PULL UP
*
or
TERRAIN AHEAD - PULL-UP
TERRAIN - PULL-UP
or
TERRAIN AHEAD - PULL-UP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
PULL UP
PULL UP
OBSTACLE - PULL-UP *
or
OBSTACLE AHEAD - PULL-UP
OBSTACLE - PULL-UP
or
OBSTACLE AHEAD - PULL-UP
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
TERRAIN
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
TERRAIN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
CAUTION - TERRAIN
or
TERRAIN AHEAD
CAUTION - TERRAIN
or
TERRAIN AHEAD
CAUTION - OBSTACLE
TERRAIN
TERRAIN
*
or
OBSTACLE AHEAD
CAUTION - OBSTACLE
or
OBSTACLE AHEAD
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
INDEX
APPENDICES
*
*
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull
Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull
Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull
Up”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN
TOO LOW - TERRAIN
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
TERRAIN
SINK RATE
“Sink Rate”
DONT SINK
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
*
TERRAIN
or
TOO LOW - TERRAIN
EIS
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-B Page)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Type
PFD/MFD†
Alert
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page when Terrain is enabled.
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Table 6-16 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. The following figure
shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
AFCS
Caut
3500
”
RATE
3000
2500
2000
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
11000
12000
APPENDICES
Descent Rate (FPM)
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
500
Figure 6-70 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE (FLTA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance feature of TAWS-B compares the aircraft’s projected flight path
with known terrain and obstacles in their respective databases and issues four types of alerts as either a
caution or a warning:
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in the following figure. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed
on the MAP - TAWS-B Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following figure.
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
700
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
AFCS
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-71 FLTA Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Values
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
INDEX
APPENDICES
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects the aircraft is significantly below the
normal approach path to a runway.
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
800
600
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
EIS
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-72 PDA Alerting Threshold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used
when inhibiting these alerts, and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA
alerts are inhibited, the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD.
Figure 6-73 TAWS Alerting Disabled (TAWS-B Inhibited) Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B PDA and FLTA alerting:
1) Select the MAP - TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If TAWS-B alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIVE HUNDRED ALTITUDE VOICE CALLOUT ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the voice alert “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft descends
to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an airport, the
“Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft is more than
5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain.
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the “Five Hundred” voice alert.
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
»» Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
»» Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
»» Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
The following two figures shows the NCR alerting parameters based on altitude loss and sink rate,
respectively, as defined by TSO-C151b.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1000
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
500
“DON’T SINK”
400
300
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
INDEX
APPENDICES
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-74 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1000
800
700
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
600
500
400
“DON’T SINK”
300
EIS
200
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-75 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
During initialization, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. The system test
can also be manually initiated. The system issues a voice alert when the test has concluded. TAWS-B System
Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
System Test in Progress
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
TAWS TEST
None
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
TAWS FAIL
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
System Test Pass
TAWS-B System Test Fail
AFCS
TAWS-B
Page Center
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Table 6-17 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the MAP - TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and GPS
status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the MAP - TAWS-B Page. The voice alert “TAWS
Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is received and the aircraft is within the terrain
database coverage area, the voice alert “TAWS Available” is generated.
PFD/MFD*
Annunciation
MAP - TAWS-B Page Center
Banner Annunciation
Voice Alert
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
TAWS FAIL
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
No GPS position
TAWS N/A
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
Excessively degraded GPS signal, aircraft
outside of terrain database coverage area
TAWS N/A
None
“TAWS Not Available”
Alert Cause
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid. TAWS operating with
PFD Terrain or Obstacle databases
Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid on all displays, invalid software
configuration, TAWS audio fault
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*Annunciation appears on MFD pages when terrain is displayed.
Table 6-18 TAWS-B Abnormal Conditions
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page of the MFD. This Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution
or warning annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The
Profile View uses the same colors for obstacle and relative terrain information as the Terrain Proxmity, Terrain-SVS
or TAWS-B systems; refer to those discussions for more information on relative terrain colors and symbols.
Enabling/Disabling Profile View:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
EIS
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
AFCS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the Profile View is
adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to one nautical mile, at which
point Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed).
When terrain and obstacles are shown on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page, this information also appears
in the Profile View Window. If the Navigation Map range is adjusted beyond the maximum map range for
terrain and obstacle data appear on the Navigation Map, this information is also removed from the Profile View
Window. Refer to the terrain discussions for information selecting the maximum map range to display terrain
and obstacles on navigation maps.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
339
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Profile Path
EIS
Range
Markers
Terrain Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Scale
Profile View Length
is One Half of the
Navigation Map Range
Distance Scale
Figure 6-78 Profile View on Navigation Map with Terrain Display Enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for unusually tall obstacles), a vertical line
appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-79 Profile View with Tall Obstacles
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PROFILE PATH
Flight Phase
Total Profile
View Width
0.6 nm
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
4.0 nm
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The contents of the Profile View Window are based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is
unavailable), and the system shows the highest known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from
the present position to the end of the profile range inside the Profile View Window. This width is determined by
the phase of flight, as annunciated on the HSI, and is widest during enroute and oceanic phases, and narrowest
during approach and departure phases.
Table 6-19 Profile View Width Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Profile Path display is a visual cue which represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile
View on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page. This path is depicted as a white rectangle and is only available
when Profile View is enabled. White range markers both edges of the Profile Path match the range markers
along the distance scale inside the Profile View Window. The Profile View distance must be at least four
nautical miles (or 7.5 km if configured for metric units) in order for the path display to appear on the MAP NAVIGATION MAP Page.
The pilot can enable or disable the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map. The pilot can also select
the maximum navigation map range to show the Profile Path. If a map range is selected beyond the selected
maximum range, the system removes the Profile Path display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the Profile Path display on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
AFCS
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum range at which Profile Path
is shown
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.8 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help
the pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
EIS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic Alert
and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS), and to TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown
without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
NOTE: TIS is disabled if another traffic system is installed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Information Service (TIS) assists the flight crew in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and provides
updates every five seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000
feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays traffic with the following symbology:
AFCS
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-20 TIS Traffic Symbols
INDEX
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA) indicates the current track of the intruder could result in a collision. When traffic meets
the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected, but is outside the
range of the map, causes a banner message to appear in the lower left corner of the map and a half TA symbol to
appear at the relative bearing of the intruder.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP
Page on which traffic can be displayed.
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for vertical speeds at least 500 feet per minute in either direction) to the right of the target
symbol. Traffic symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or
climb/descent information.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
EIS
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps (when TIS is operating):
-- PFD Inset Map
-- AUX - TRIP PLANNING Page
-- MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
-- Nearest Pages
-- MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
-- FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an the system displays a status icon to
indicate the feature is enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Traffic Advisory
Non-Threat Traffic
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Status
Banners
APPENDICES
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Traffic Display
Enabled
Figure 6-80 TIS Traffic on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
EIS
The MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/
disabling display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data
(symbols and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is
selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those
selected for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Customizing traffic display on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
AFCS
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page with the changed settings.
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
The MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
current position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map page for viewing TIS
traffic information. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map
range is adjustable with the Joystick from two to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page. When the aircraft
is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from
Standby to Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status
discussion for more information.
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
AFCS
Figure 6-81 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TIS ALERTS
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
When the number of TAs on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page increases from one scan to the next, the following
occur:
-- A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
-- A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
-- The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
345
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-82 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert occurs when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of range.
TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
-- Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
-- Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
-- Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
-- Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in
all directions.
-- Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
AFCS
1) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP
Page Center Banner
Annunciation
NO DATA
UNAVAILABLE
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FAILED
Description
EIS
DATA FAILED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during initialization. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the initialization test, the system displays an
annunciation in the center of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-21 TIS Failure Annunciations
System Test has
Failed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Data Not
Received from
Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-83 TIS Initialization Test Failure
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page. When the aircraft
is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while
Standby Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed).
Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode
can be changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page)
Mode
OPERATING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TIS Operating
TIS Standby
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
FAIL
TIS Failed
EIS
Table 6-22 TIS Modes
Switching between TIS modes:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey select a mode. The mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key. The
annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner
of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TA OFF SCALE
AGE MM:SS
TRFC FAIL
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRFC RMVD
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
EIS
TRFC COAST
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
TRFC UNAVAIL
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NO TRFC DATA
*Shown as symbol on MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
**Shown in center of MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-23 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.9 SKYWATCH SKY497 TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
EIS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of on-board traffic system limitations. These systems require transponders
of other aircraft to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations
due phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed
intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude
separation data or climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when a TAS system is installed.
NOTE: Refer to the pertinent manual for a detailed discussion on the Skywatch SKY497.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS SYMBOLOGY
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft.
TAS uses an on-board interrogator-processor and the Mode S transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link.
Traffic is displayed using the symbols shown in the following tables.
350
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
EIS
Table 6-24 TAS Symbol Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic with ADS-B directional information, but positional
accuracy is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft
track.
Table 6-25 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Symbology
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AFCS
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that
is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the
relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft is
within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm that
is neither a TA or PA.
A solid white rounded arrow indicates either a PA or Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information,
but the position of the traffic is shown with degraded accuracy.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in hundreds
of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic
is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol indicates climbing or descending traffic with an
upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
-- A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. The announcement
“Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” indicates the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own altitude,
and approximately four nautical miles away.
-- A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
-- The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
-- If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of maps with traffic displayed instead of a TA symbol. The text will
indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the conditions that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-84 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Distance
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-26 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM TEST
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
test while in-flight.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the system is operating normally. The test takes about
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page. The traffic system issues a voice alert when the test is completed. If the system
passes the test, the traffic system enters Standby Mode. If the system test fails, the system enters Failure Mode.
EIS
Testing the Traffic System:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full traffic test pattern display.
4) Press the TEST Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The traffic system automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after
takeoff. The system automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.
After supplying system power, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The unit must be in Operating Mode for
traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Pressing the OPERATE Softkey allows the traffic system to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Pressing the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
EIS
Switching from Operating Mode to Standby Mode:
On the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, press the STANDBY Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key.
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
AFCS
The MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick
from two to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat Traffic, 2500’ Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
EIS
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above, Level
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory
Off-Scale, 400’
Below, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic, Altitude
Not Reported
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-85 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
Displaying traffic on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
AFCS
4) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
5) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude Display
The Pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
EIS
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, press the BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
Flight ID Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: This feature requires the installation of a transponder with the Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast (ADS-B) Out capability.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can displayed on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page. When a
flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol on the MAP - TRAFFIC
MAP Page when this option is enabled.
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight ID
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-86 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page with Flight IDs Enabled
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
On the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state).
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick from two to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the display range on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
»» MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
»» MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
»» AUX - TRIP PLANNING Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps on the MFD when the unit is operating:
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
»» Nearest Pages
»» FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page
»» System Pages
AFCS
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, a traffic icon is shown to
indicate traffic is enabled for display.
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure the traffic system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic
Advisory
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Proximity
Traffic
EIS
TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Status
Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory Banner
Annunciation
Figure 6-87 TAS Traffic on MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Customizing the traffic display on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
AFCS
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu
controls the map range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a
map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the
Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional data link weather information.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
EIS
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic System
Mode
Self-test Initiated
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operating
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page)
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
OPERATING
Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Failed*
FAIL
* See Table 6-37 for additional failure annunciations
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-27 Traffic System Modes
360
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the MAP TRAFFIC MAP Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NO DATA
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
EIS
Table 6-28 Traffic Failure Annunciations
Traffic Status Banner Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
TRFC FAIL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic system has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly
formatted data)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Data is not being received from the traffic system.
*Shown as symbol on MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
**Shown in center of MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
Table 6-29 Traffic Status Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.10 GARMIN ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
EIS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system. It includes air-to-air, air-to-ground,
and ground-to-air transmission of aircraft position and velocity data to provide pilots and controllers with a
more comprehensive view air traffic to improve flight safety and efficiency.
ADS-B relies on the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail
Number, ICAO registration number, etc), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS
1090 ES
18,000 FT
AFCS
10,000 FT
Mode A/C
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B
Ground
Station
Figure 6-88 ADS-B System
APPENDICES
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
INDEX
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking data from one link
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
and rebroadcasting it on the other link. For example, two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978 MHz, the ground station retransmits the
data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
EIS
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system. When an
ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground station, the ground
station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is then included in the list of
aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary Surveillance
Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage, and is transmitting
its altitude.
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B WITH TAS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an optional Skywatch SKY497 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is also installed and operating with the
optional ADS-B Traffic, the SKY497 TAS will receive traffic information and attempt to match (or “correlate”)
this traffic with the corresponding ADS-B traffic information. When a correlation is made, only the traffic
with the most accurate information is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only
detected by one system but not the other) will also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic by
the ADS-B improves the accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same aircraft
being displayed twice.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically depicted as two aircraft on
the display.
AFCS
Either the TAS or the ADS-B unit can issue a traffic alert.
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS systems discussed previously.
The SKY497 with ADS-B issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic!
Two O’clock, Low, Two Miles.”
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Radar Altitude (if available), Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to
adjust the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4
Up to 1000 (RA
or HAT)
Any
Any
Any
Lookahead
time
(sec)
20
4
4
Unavailable
Unavailable
Any
Unavailable
Any
Approach
Any
Any
20
20
850
850
0.20
0.20
5
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Any
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Terminal
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
GPS Phase
of Flight
Own Altitude
(Feet)
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
7
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
8
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
6
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Sensitivity Radar Altitude
Level
(Feet)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Vertical
Threshold
for Alert
(feet)
850
Protected
Volume
(NM)
0.20
INDEX
Table 6-30 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
-- The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
-- A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
-- The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
-- If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, an amber text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-89 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through “Twelve
o’clock”or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if within
200 feet of own altitude), or “Altitude not
available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Relative Altitude
AFCS
Bearing
Table 6-31 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SKY497 can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a MAP - TRAFFIC
MAP Page range of two nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in
addition to traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features
section for more information about SafeTaxi displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B, all traffic information may not
be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for display in the SURF environment,
some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Individual eligibility for AIRB and SURF
is depicted on the AUX-ADS-B STATUS Page, discussed later in this section.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SURF Application
On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Aircraft traffic is on
the ground
APPENDICES
Ground Vehicles
INDEX
Figure 6-90 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page with SURF Mode On
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the following table. Above or below the traffic symbol
is the traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates the traffic is
climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is
only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or
own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on
the ground.
Table 6-32 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OPERATION
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
APPENDICES
The MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid
heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Airborne
Application On
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Advisory
with Directional
Information 200’
Above, Descending
Non-Threat
Traffic with
Directional
Information
10000’ Below,
Climbing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Altitude
Not Reported
Proximity
Advisory with
Directional
Information,
500’ Above,
Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-91 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
2) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
3) If an optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
APPENDICES
4) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
368
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFDs. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test
pattern is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-92 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page with Test Mode Enabled
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TA’s
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
AFCS
1) On the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
APPENDICES
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in the previous step 2):
•
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Absolute Motion
Vectors
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-93 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
2) Press the MOTION Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
ABS:
Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
REL:
Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
OFF:
Disables the display of the motion vector.
EIS
Or:
a) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
b) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
d) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Relative Motion
Vectors
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-94 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
APPENDICES
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
2) Press the MOTION Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the DURATION Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, press the BACK Softkey to return to the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight ID Display
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP
Page. When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol on the
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page when this option is enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight ID
Figure 6-95 MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page with Flight IDs Enabled
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
AFCS
On the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This
may include the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft,
service vehicle, unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Push the FMS Knob. A cyan bracket highlights the first selected traffic symbol. Additional information appears
in a window in the upper-right corner of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan bracket until the selected aircraft
traffic symbol is highlighted.
4) When finished, push the FMS Knob again to remove the cyan selection bracket.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
EIS
The display range on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the display range on the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page:
Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the range of the traffic map, or counter-clockwise to decrease the range.
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
»» FPL - ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Page
»» Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
»» PFD Inset Map
»» MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
»» AUX - TRIP PLANNING Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
AFCS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate
traffic is enabled for display.
APPENDICES
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure the traffic system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
373
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Proximity Advisory
without Directional
Information
Traffic Advisory
with Directional
Information
EIS
Non-Threat Traffic
with Directional
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory
with Directional
Information
TA Off Scale
Banner
Traffic Overlay
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic Advisory
Figure 6-96 ADS-B Traffic on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the traffic display on the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page:
1) Select the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
APPENDICES
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu
controls the map range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a
map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the
Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the MAP - NAVIGATION MAP Page.
The PFD can display traffic on either the inset navigation map or a traffic inset map. The traffic inset map
resembles the Traffic Map Page and is shown in a heading-up orientation.
Displaying traffic information on the PFD inset maps:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic information on the PFD inset navigation map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the TRFC-1 Softkey to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the TRFC-2 Softkey to remove traffic information from the PFD inset navigation map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
MAP - TRAFFIC MAP
Page Center Banner
Annunciation
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
ADS-B: SURF
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ABD-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
NO TRK/HDG
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
FAILED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page.
EIS
Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-44 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-33 Traffic Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the MAP TRAFFIC MAP Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Traffic Map Page Center Annunciation
AFCS
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-34 Traffic Failure Annunciations
INDEX
APPENDICES
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TA OFF SCALE
TRFC FAIL
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
EIS
NO TRFC DATA
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
*Shown as symbol on MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
**Shown in center of MAP - TRAFFIC MAP Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-35 Traffic Status Annunciations
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the AUX - ADS-B STATUS
Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B STATUS Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-97 ADS-B Traffic Status on AUX - ADS-B STATUS Page
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUX - ADS-B STATUS
Page Item
Traffic Application
Status: AIRBORNE
(AIRB), SURFACE
(SURF), AIRBORNE
ALERTS (CSA)
Status Message
Description
ON
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GDL 88 is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GDL 88 is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of a number of minutes.
AVAILABLE TO RUN
NOT AVAILABLE
EIS
FAULT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOT CONFIGURED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last uplink
---------------AVAILABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-36 AUX-ADS-B STATUS Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Current Pertinent Flight Manual for the installed autopilot.
7.1 S-TEC FIFTY FIVE X AUTOPILOT (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE ANNUNCIATION
EIS
NOTE: Only the additional ‘FD’ mode annunciation that may appear in the G1000 AFCS Status Box is
discussed below. This mode annunciation is not analogous to both the G1000 and the S-TEC Fifty Five
X. Refer to the approved S-TEC Fifty Five X Pilot’s Pertinent Flight Manual for a comprehensive list of
annunciations and operating instructions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In addition to the redundant status/mode annunciations and/or visual representations that are simultaneously
displayed on both the G1000 (AFCS Status Box and/or PFD) and the S-TEC Fifty Five X (Autopilot Display and/
or Remote Annunciator Display), the G1000 displays an additional mode annunciation of ‘FD’ when the Flight
Director Mode is engaged.
Flight
Director
Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-1 Flight Director Mode Engaged
(G1000 AFCS Status Box)
ALTITUDE PRESELECT
AFCS
The ALT Knob on the PFD is used to enter the selected altitude, which is provided to the STEC Fifty Five X
autopilot. Refer to the STEC Fifty Five X User’s Manual for details on the altitude preselect function.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
379
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• AOPA™ or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
• SiriusXM® Satellite Radio entertainment
• Electronic Checklist
• Flight Data Logging
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The FliteCharts and optional ChartView provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
The AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment
choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
Electronic checklists allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure for a particular phase of flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SafeTaxi feature gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The maximum map ranges
for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to show the airport detail,
the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport landmarks including
ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When
the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced position
awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the
maximum configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
Airport
Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
AFCS
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
383
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-2 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
SAFETAXI
Option
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
INDEX
Figure 8-3 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
384
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
Note, the grey shading is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD
display. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted
geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to
the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inset Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Area
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
Available data includes:
APPENDICES
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc.
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SHW CHRT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HEADER
PLAN
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
INFO-2
ALL
STAR
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-5 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
AFCS
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
386
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-6 Option Menus
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-7 Chart Not Available Banner
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
AFCS
Figure 8-8 Unable To Display Chart Banner
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is the one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a chart:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Scroll Through
Entire Chart
With the
Joystick
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
INDEX
Once the desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the
Joystick. Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the
Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown
Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the
MAP page group. Pressing the INFO Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different
chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is
shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries.
The Denver International airport has five additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Takeoff Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline Parking Gate Location. (The
numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft
Current
Position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-10 Airport Information Page, Info View, Full Screen Width
AFCS
The Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the Denver Class B Airspace Chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
389
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-11 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from Info View
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
»» Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
»» Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
»» Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
»» Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
»» Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When
NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM
Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the
NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
CHART OPTIONS
INDEX
APPENDICES
»» Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the Chart Options level.
»» Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Complete
Chart Shown
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-12 Approach Information Page,
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
»» Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
»» Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
»» Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
»» Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of
the approach chart.
»» If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
»» Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
»» Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts mto the chart selection softkeys.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-13 Page Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
AFCS
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-14 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
392
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
EIS
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-15 Arrival Information Page, Day View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
393
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-16 Arrival Information Page, Night View
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 FLITECHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of Aeronautical Information Services terminal procedures charts. The
charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
EIS
Figure 8-17 Aircraft Not Shown Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin.
Available data includes:
-- Arrivals (STAR)
-- Approaches
-- Departure Procedures (DP)
-- Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
395
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Off-Scale
Areas
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
Figure 8-18 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
INDEX
APPENDICES
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart
and advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
SHW CHRT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
INFO-2
STAR
WX
APR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CHRT OPT
GO BACK
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
EIS
ALL
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-19 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AFCS
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a chart:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pan Entire
Chart With
the Joystick
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-20 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Info Box
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-21 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the sytem softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Airport Diagram and the navigation
map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
Pressing the Info Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the displayed
chart is the airport diagram, the Info Softkey has no effect.
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart or to the right of the chart
for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using
the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank.
»» Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
»» Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
»» Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
»» Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
»» Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data if a data link weather receiver is installed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
399
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-22 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the
INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Denver International airport has three
additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and Take-off Minimums.
In the example shown, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate
Minimums Chart.
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available. The aircraft symbol is shown
on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the boundaries of the chart. The
aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the Chart Scale Box displays a
banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown.
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to
complete the selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
CHART OPTIONS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the entire chart on the screen.
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
AFCS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
APPENDICES
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
EIS
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the SiriusXM Datalink Transceiver is available
for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The SiriusXM Datalink Transceiver can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio
entertainment services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the SiriusXM
Datalink Transceiver. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the
coded IDs to send an activation signal that, when received by the SiriusXM Datalink Transceiver, allows it to
play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
-- On the label on the back of the SiriusXM Datalink Transceiver.
-- On the XM Information Page on the MFD.
-- On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at flyGarmin.com.)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save SiriusXM
Datalink Transceiver activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during
normal SiriusXM Satellite Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected
during flight. Refer to the SiriusXM Datalink Transceiver Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-0035504, Rev K or later) for further information.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select XM RADIO.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify the desired services are activated.
INDEX
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio
Radio ID
Data
Radio ID
EIS
Weather
Products
Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MUTE and LOCK
Softkeys
Figure 8-23 XM Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, the weather product boxes will appear empty on the
XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather
Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
USING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO
AFCS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select XM RADIO.
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active
Channels
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Channel
List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Categories
Field
Figure 8-24 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel the SiriusXM Radio
is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
AFCS
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, Press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Push the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
APPENDICES
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
EIS
Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-25 Categories List
AFCS
PRESETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
APPENDICES
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Press SET to
Save Each Preset
Channel
EIS
Figure 8-26 Accessing and Selecting Preset SiriusXM Channels
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUME
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
Figure 8-27 Volume Control
AFCS
Radio volume may also be adjusted at each passenger station.
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
system.
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Manifold Pressure
• Propeller RPM
• Turbine Inlet Temperature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source
• Selected course
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• CDI deflection
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• GPS fix
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• GPS vertical alert limit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Date
Time
GPS altitude (MSL)
GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
Baro Correction (in/Hg)
Indicated airspeed (kts)
Vertical speed (fpm)
GPS vertical speed (fpm)
OAT (degrees C)
True airspeed (knots)
Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
Ground Speed (kts)
Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EIS
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
The file containing the recorded data will appear. This file can be imported into most computer spreadsheet
applications.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no airport
is found)
log_200210_104506_KIXD.csv
EIS
Figure 8-28 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
408
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the Piper PA-32. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist
information described in the pertinent flight manual or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
EIS
The optional checklist functions are displayed on two levels of softkeys that are available on any MFD page.
(Optional)
SYSTEM
MAP
DCLTR
CHECK
EXIT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
EMERGCY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The CHECK Softkey label changes to UNCHECK
when the checklist item is already checked.
Figure 8-29 Checklist Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure
on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into
the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-on Page messages display
‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the CHKLIST Softkey is not available.
Accessing and navigating checklists:
AFCS
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘CHECKLIST’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
Figure 8-30 Sample Checklist
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the EMERGCY Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
INDEX
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
8) Press the RETURN Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
9) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-31 Emergency Checklist Page Example
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SIRIUSXM DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
-- Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
-- Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
-- Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
-- Ensure that nothing is plugged into the Music jack(s) because this would prevent SiriusXM Satellite Radio
from being heard
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-32 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD))
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
NO SIGNAL
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
XM Radio Page (MFD)
EIS
LOADING
WAITING FOR DATA...
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-1 SiriusXM Data Link Receiver Messages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
413
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Blank Page
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
•
EIS
•
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
CAS Window: The CAS Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert levels
described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed
Indicator. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are
not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
ALERTS Window: The ALERTS Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the ALERTS Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
ALERTS Window from the display. When the ALERTS Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to
scroll through the message list.
Softkey Annunciation: When a new system message is issued, the ALERTS Softkey flashes to alert the flight
crew of a new message. It continues to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are
displayed in white text. Messages that have become inactive change to gray text. The ALERTS Softkey flashes if
the state of a displayed message changes or a new message is displayed. The inactive messages can be removed
from the Messages Window by pressing the flashing ALERTS Softkey.
System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by a
failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Annunciations Section for more information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
CAS Window
AFCS
Alerts Softkey
Annunciation
APPENDICES
Figure A-1 Alerting System
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Alerts Window
• Audio Alerting System: The Garmin system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the
AUX - System Status Page.
INDEX
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
415
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
Figure A-2 System Status Page, Annunciation Tone Testing
Press to Test Annunciation
Tone
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for corrective pilot actions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are considered already
acknowledged.
The Alerting System uses three alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory)
and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its
urgency and on required action:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) Window is located on the right side of the PFD. Warning messages cannot
be scrolled through and remain at the top of the CAS window. The scroll bar appears if more caution and
advisory messages exist than can be displayed at once or if messages have been scrolled off the display. The
CAS softkeys also become available.
AFCS
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate attention. A warning alert appears in the CAS Window
and is accompanied by a continuously repeating chime. Text appearing in the CAS Window is red. A warning
alert is also accompanied by a flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation. Pressing the Warning Softkey
acknowledges the warning alert and stops the aural tone, if applicable.
CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
pilot intervention. When a new caution alert appears in the CAS Window, it is shown in black on amber
inverse video in conjunction with the CAUTION Softkey and is accompanied by a single chime. Pressing
the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges all amber messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once acknowledged,
caution messages are displayed until the issue is corrected.
ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information. When a new white advisory appears in the CAS
window, it is shown in black on white inverse video in conjunction with the ADVISORY Softkey.
System Alert Message Advisory: This level of alert provides general information to the pilot. Message
Advisories appear in the Alerts Window and are not shown in the CAS Window. When a Message Advisory
occurs, the system provides a white flashing ALERTS Softkey annunciation. Pressing the softkey acknowledges
the message advisory alert, stops the white flashing ALERTS Softkey annunciation, and displays the associated
text in the Alerts Window. The ALERTS Softkey annunciation label remains until a new message is displayed.
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Some CAS messages can be display in more than one alert level group. For example, a message might display
as both a warning and a caution, but cannot appear more than once at any given time. If the received signals
justify multiple priorities for a certain message, the message is displayed for the higher priority condition.
When graduating to a higher priority, the message flashes and requires new acknowledgment. When degrading
to a lower priority condition, the message moves to the top of the appropriate grouping, but does not require
new acknowledgment.
EIS
CAS
Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-3 Annunciation Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure A-4 Warning, Caution, and Advisory Softkey Annunciations
CAS ANNUNCIATIONS
AFCS
Red annunciation window text signifies warnings, amber signifies cautions, white signifies advisories, and
green signifies safe. See the current version of the pertinent flight manual for a list of CAS annunciations and
for recommended pilot action.
STARTER ENGD
Description
No output from main alternator.
Carbon monoxide level is high
Emergency battery is voltage is low.
Essential bus voltage is less than 24.5V.
No output from standby alternator.
Oil pressure is below 25 psi.
Oil pressure is above 115 psi.
APPENDICES
Warning Messages
ALTNTR INOP
CO LVL HIGH
EMER BAT LOW
ESS BUS LOW
NO STBY ALT
OIL PRES LO
OIL PRES HI
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WARNING MESSAGES
Starter is engaged.
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
CAUTION MESSAGES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Caution Messages
AIR COND DR
BAGGAGE DOOR
EMER BAT LOW
FLAPS
PITOT FAIL
PITOT OFF
SHED LOAD
Description
Air conditioning door is open.
Baggage door is open.
Emergency battery state of charge less than 75 percent.
Flap position and flap setting do not agree.
Pitot heat is inoperative.
Pitot heat is off.
Shed electrical load. (Issued again 5 minutes after initially displayed and acknowledged.)
EIS
ADVISORY MESSAGES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Advisory Messages
ADF FAN
AIR COND DR
AVIONICS FAN
DISPLAY FAN
EMER BAT NC
STBY ALT ON
Description
The ADF cooling fan is inoperative. (Only available when ADF is installed.)
Air conditioning door is operating properly.
The cooling fan for the remote avionics is inop.
The cooling fan for the display is inoperative.
The emergency battery is not charging.
Standby alternator on.
MESSAGE ADVISORY ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alerts Window Message
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative..
MDF FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.
GIA FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the GIAs is inoperative.
DISPLAY INHIBITS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., L FUEL QTY warning and L FUEL
QTY caution) only the higher alert level is displayed.
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
VOICE ALERTS
APPENDICES
The following audio alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender (see the
AUX - System Setup Page to change the audio alert voice).
INDEX
Voice Alert
“Minimums, Minimums”
“Traffic”
“TIS Not Available”
418
Alert Trigger
The aircraft has descended below the preset minimum descent altitude or decision altitude.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the TIS system.
The aircraft is outside the TIS coverage area.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or an
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as
shown previously in the System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the
system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The current version of the
pertinent flight manual takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
GDC1 is reporting the altitude error correction is unavailable.
GDC1 is reporting the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The GDC1 should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The cooling fan for the aft remote avionics has failed.
The #1 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The #1 AHRS calibration version error. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check the current
version of the pertinent flight manual for limitations. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G1000
system should be serviced when possible.
A failure has been detected in the #1 AHRS. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Comments
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AHRS1 GPS– AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS– AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 GPS– AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 SERVICE– AHRS1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
AHRS1 SRVC– AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving valid
airspeed.
EIS
Message
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 SERVICE– ADC1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
AFT AV FAN FAIL– The cooling fan for
aft avionics has failed.
AHRS MAG DB– AHRS magnetic
model database version mismatch.
AHRS1 CAL– AHRS1 calibration
version error. Srvc req’d.
AHRS1 CONFIG– AHRS1 config error.
Config service req’d.
AHRS1 GPS– AHRS1 not receiving any
GPS information.
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
APR ADVISORY – SBAS VNAV not
available.
APR DWNGRADE– Apr downgraded.
APR INACTV– Approach is not active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR– Airspace near– less
than 2 nm.
ARSPC NEAR– Airspace near and
ahead.
CHECK CRS– Database course for
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CHECK CRS– Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CNFG MODULE– PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
COM1 CONFIG– COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM1 MANIFEST– COM1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 PTT– COM1 push-to-talk key is
stuck.
Comments
SBAS VNAV not available. Check GPS sensor.
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.
The system notifies the pilot the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
COM1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The G1000
system should be serviced.
COM1 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
COM1 RMT XFR– COM1 remote
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer key is stuck.
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
COM1 SERVICE– COM1 needs service. The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The G1000
Return unit for repair.
system should be serviced when possible.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1. The transmitter
Reducing transmitter power.
is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be
serviced.
COM2 CONFIG– COM2 config error.
COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The G1000
Config service req’d.
system should be serviced.
COM2 MANIFEST– COM2 software
COM2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
COM2 PTT– COM2 push-to-talk key is The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
stuck.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
COM2 RMT XFR– COM2 remote
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer key is stuck.
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
should be serviced.
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
421
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
EIS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Comments
The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The G1000
system should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The transmitter
is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be
serviced.
CURSOR LIMITED– Map panning limit Map cursor panning is limited to < 89 degrees north or south.
has been reached.
DATA LOST– Pilot stored data was lost. The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
Recheck settings.
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFDs with preferred settings, if desired.
DB CHANGE– Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
DB CHANGE– Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify the usermodified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB MISMATCH– Navigation database The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions installed.
mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH– Obstacle database
The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH– Standby Navigation The PFDs and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH– Terrain database
The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
FAILED PATH– A data path has failed. A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/W has failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-on, the G1000 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
is locked.
locked. This occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete
waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message.
This can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted. Remove the
waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database, or Update the
waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
G/S1 FAIL– G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
COM2 SERVICE– COM2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
G/S1 SERVICE– G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 FAIL– G/S2 is inoperative.
Comments
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
G/S2 SERVICE– G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GDC1 MANIFEST– GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GDL69 CONFIG– GDL 69 config error. GDL 69A/69A SXM configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
Config service req’d.
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL– GDL 69 has failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69A/69A SXM. The receiver is unavailable.
The G1000 system should be serviced
GDL69 MANIFEST– GDL software
The GDL 69A/69A SXM has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should
mismatch, communication halted.
be serviced.
GEA1 CONFIG– GEA1 config error.
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
Config service req’d.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
GEA1 MANIFEST– GEA1 software
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch, communication halted.
serviced.
GEO LIMITS– AHRS1 too far North/
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass.
flagged as invalid.
GIA1 CONFIG– GIA1 audio config
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The G1000 system should be
error. Config service req’d.
serviced.
GIA1 CONFIG– GIA1 config error.
The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d.
G1000 system should be serviced.
GIA1 COOLING– GIA1 over
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be
temperature.
serviced.
GIA1 COOLING– GIA1 temperature
The GIA1 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
too low.
operating temperature.
GIA1 MANIFEST– GIA1 software
The GIA 1 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 SERVICE– GIA1 needs service.
The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000 system should be
Return unit for repair.
serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG– GIA2 audio config
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The G1000 system should be
error. Config service req’d.
serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG– GIA2 config error.
The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d.
G1000 system should be serviced.
GIA2 COOLING– GIA2 over
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be
temperature.
serviced.
GIA2 COOLING– GIA2 temperature
The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
too low.
operating temperature.
GIA2 MANIFEST– GIA2 software
The GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
423
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
EIS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Comments
The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
GMA1 MANIFEST– GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch, communication halted.
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE– GMA1 needs service. The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio may still
Return unit for repair.
be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G1000 system should be
serviced when possible.
GMU1 MANIFEST– GMU1 software
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GPS NAV LOST– Loss of GPS
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
navigation. GPS fail.
GPS NAV LOST– Loss of GPS
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST– Loss of GPS
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
navigation. Position error.
A failure has been detected in GPS1 receiver. The system should be serviced.
GPS1 FAIL– GPS1 is inoperative.
GPS1 SERVICE– GPS1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the GPS1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in GPS2 receiver. The system should be serviced.
GPS2 FAIL– GPS1 is inoperative.
GPS2 SERVICE– GPS2 needs service. A failure has been detected in the GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
GRS1 MANIFEST– GRS1 software
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GTX1 MANIFEST– GTX1 software
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch, communication halted.
serviced.
HDG FAULT– AHRS1 magnetometer
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
fault has occurred.
GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
HW MISMATCH– GIA hardware
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable.
mismatch. GIA1 communication halted.
HW MISMATCH– GIA hardware
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable.
mismatch. GIA2 communication halted.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
LOCKED FPL– Cannot navigate locked This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
LOI– GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
with other NAVS.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
GIA2 SERVICE– GIA2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GMA1 CONFIG– GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GMA1 FAIL– GMA1 is inoperative.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all course
angles.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
MFD1 BKLT CAL INV– MFD1 bklt cal
lost or mismatch. Return for repair.
MFD1 CARD 1 ERR– MFD1 card 1 is
invalid.
MFD1 CARD 1 REM– MFD1 card 1
was removed. Reinsert card.
MFD1 CARD 2 ERR– MFD1 card 2 is
invalid.
MFD1 CARD 2 REM– MFD1 card 2
was removed. Reinsert card.
MFD1 CONFIG– MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 COOLING– MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 DB ERR– MFD1 basemap
database is incompatible.
MFD1 DB ERR– MFD1 database error
exists.
MFD1 DB ERR– MFD1 Obstacle
database missing.
AFCS
MFD1 DB ERR– MFD1 Terrain
database missing.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD1 KEYSTK– MFD [key name] Key
is stuck.
MFD1 MANIFEST– MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MFD1 SERVICE– MFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
NAV DB UPDATED– Active navigation
database updated.
NAV1 MANIFEST– NAV1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
NAV1 RMT XFR– NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
424
Comments
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
The specified GDU’s backlight calibration cannot be found or found or is invalid. The
system should be serviced.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD detected an incompatibility in the basemap database.
The MFD detected a failure in one or more databases. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
Ensure the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
G1000 system should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
Ensure the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
database.
NAV1 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
The specified GDU’s backlight calibration cannot be found or found or is invalid. The
system should be serviced.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
PFD1 detected an incompatibility in the basemap database.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD1 detected a failure in one or more databases. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
Ensure the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
G1000 system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR– PFD1 Terrain database The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
missing.
Ensure the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
G1000 system should be serviced.
PFD1 KEYSTK– PFD1 [key name] Key A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
is stuck.
times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
PFD1 MANIFEST– PFD1 software
The PFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION–
PFD1 bklt cal lost or mismatch. Return
for repair.
PFD1 CARD 1 ERR– PFD1 card 1 is
invalid.
PFD1 CARD 1 REM– PFD1 card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
PFD1 CARD 2 ERR– PFD1 card 2 is
invalid.
PFD1 CARD 2 REM– PFD1 card 2 was
removed. Reinsert card.
PFD1 CONFIG– PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
PFD1 COOLING– PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 DB ERR– PFD1 basemap
database is incompatible.
PFD1 DB ERR– PFD1 database error
exists.
PFD1 DB ERR– PFD1 Obstacle
database missing.
Comments
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV2 SERVICE– NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS
for navigation to [xxxx]
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
NAV1 SERVICE– NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 MANIFEST– NAV2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
NAV2 RMT XFR– NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
425
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Message
PFD1 SERVICE– PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PTK FAIL– Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL– Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL– Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
REGISTER CONNEXT– Data services
are inoperative, register w/Connext.
SCHEDULER [#]– <message>.
SLCT FREQ– Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT MAG– Select MAGNETIC NAV
ANGLE display units.
SLCT NAV– Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
SLCT NON-MAG– Select alternate
NAV ANGLE display units.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
STRMSCP FAIL– Stormscope has
failed.
SVT DISABLED– Out of available
terrain region.
Comments
The PFD a self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should be serviced.
SVT DISABLED– Terrain DB resolution
too low.
TIMER EXPIRD– Timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL– Traffic device has
failed.
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness audio
source unavailable.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (4.9 arcsecond or better) is not currently installed.
The system notifies the pilot, the timer has expired.
The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
The audio source for terrain awareness is offline. Check GIA1 or GIA 2.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The system is not registered with Garmin Flight Data Services, or it’s current
registration data has failed authentication.
Message criteria entered by the user.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to Magnetic.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to True.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
VNV– Unavailable: Excessive crosstrack The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
error.
VNV– Unavailable: Excessive track
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
angle error.
invalid.
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Comments
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
EIS
The MFD and PFDs are not communicating with each other. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
XPDR1 FAIL– XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 SERVICE– XPDR1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
XTALK ERROR– A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
VNV– Unavailable: Parallel course
selected.
VNV– Unavailable: Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
427
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Blank Page
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
on flygarmin.com.
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground.
Go to flygarmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load verious types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards
are required for database upldates. Use only 8 GB, 16 GB, or 32 GB cards. If it is desired to leave the card in
the system, only Garmin, OEM, or dealer provided cards should be used. SD cards obtained elsewhere, may be
acceptable for database loading, but must be removed when database loading is complete.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as navigation and ChartView database updates. Not all SD cards
are compatible with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card other than
a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page.
AFCS
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-on screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in amber.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
following:
ƒƒ It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
ƒƒ Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
ƒƒ Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
current version of the pertinent flight manual and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot,
the aircraft, and installed equipment.
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
APPENDIX B
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at flygarmin.com by selecting
‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
EIS
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to
coordinate the revised DQRs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAVIGATION DATABASES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. There are two possible methods for updating the
navigation database. If the 28-day cycle of your navigation database has already ended, you must update the
active navigation database. However, if the expiration date of the navigation database hasn’t already been
reached, you may load a standby navigation database. The system will then automatically update the active
database at the first aircraft power-on when the new navigation becomes effective.
The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user supplied SD data card. Go to flygarmin.
com or www.jeppesen.com for subscription and update information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: To do this procedure, use a blank SD card to copy the navigation database. Garmin SD Cards (bottom
SD card slots) must NOT be used. The use of SanDisk SD Card is recommended to update the navigation
database file. Before utilization, it is recommended to format the SD Card with the FAT32 file system so that
displays will read it.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
AFCS
Updating the active navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or Automatic
Database Synchronization Features):
1) Go to flygarmin.com or www.jeppesen.com. Install the navigation database on a blank SD card.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of the
display (label of SD card facing left).
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
Figure B-1 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
430
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading only the active database.
5) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
6) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the display is
starting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
8) Repeat steps 2 through 7 for the other display. Remove the SD card when finished.
9) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on the MFD to acknowledge the startup
screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey, to show active navigation database information for each display.
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected
PFD1 DB Selected
AFCS
Figure B-3 Display Database Softkey
13) Verify the correct navigation database cycle information is shown for each display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure B-4 Check Database Cycle Number (MFD shown)
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new database
becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (when power is applied on-ground) as to whether the database
should be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system
will copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-on. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into
the active internal database location. Loading the standby database to the active location takes approximately
45-55 seconds. During the loading process ‘Please Wait. Navigation Database Update in Progress. Do Not
Remove Power from Displays’ will be displayed on screen. After startup is complete, the pilot is alerted the
update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
In some situations, such as an overnight flight in which departure date is prior to the effective date
of the standby database and arrival date is after the effective date, it may be desired to force the loaded
standby database into active service earlier than the system would otherwise make the change. This can be
accomplished by selecting the STBY DB Softkey on the AUX-System Status Page. Turn system power off,
then on to complete the database change.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: After the standby navigation database is installed, the card must be removed.
Loading a standby navigation database:
AFCS
NOTE: To do this procedure, use a blank SD card to copy the navigation database. Garmin SD Cards (bottom
SD card slots) must NOT be used. The use of SanDisk SD Card is recommended to update the navigation
database file. Before utilization, it is recommended to format the SD Card with the FAT32 file system so that
displays will read it.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Go to flygarmin.com or www.jeppesen.com. Install the navigation database on a blank SD card.
2) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the display.
3) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of the display.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.
Figure B-5 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the YES softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom of the display.
6) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, the display will appear.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-6 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete
7) As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-7 Navigation Database Verification Prompt
8) Press any key to continue. The display will now appear.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-8 Active Navigation Database Prompt
9) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid,
it should not be loaded as the active database. Do not remove power while the display is starting.
APPENDICES
10) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
11) Repeat steps 2 through 10 for the other display(s).
12) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key on the MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
13) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
INDEX
14) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
15) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for each display.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected
PFD1 DB Selected
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure B-9 Display Database Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
16) Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information is shown for each display.
Figure B-10 Check Database Cycle Number (MFD shown)
GARMIN DATABASES
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
-- Expanded basemap
-- Terrain
-- Obstacle
-- FliteCharts or ChartView
-- Airport Directory (AOPA or
AC-U-KWIK)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on three Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts and ChartView, which are loaded
on only one card). Each Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card of each display. These cards must
not be removed except to update the databases stored on each card.
MFD
INDEX
APPENDICES
PFD1
Figure B-11 Correct Database Locations
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides detailed information about airports and heliports,
along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. The AOPA Airport Directory covers U.S.
airports, while the AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory coverage area may be worldwide or regional, depending on
the database purchased. Both AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases are updated every 56 days.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States, Canada, and Europe. This database
is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer
function.
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update
information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
AFCS
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single
SD database card to the SD cards on the PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-on, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that
does not already contain that database.
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, Safetaxi, Obstacle, Airport Directory and
(AOPA or AC-U-KWIK). This feature applies only to databases that are stored on the SD card that resides
in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the navigation database which is stored
internally in each display, to the Terrain database, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and ChartView)
which are only required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download new
databases to the MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD.
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window. This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable database, including
the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being copied. When the
synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to which the databases
were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred on the current poweron.
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.
Figure B-12 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Display Database Softkey is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon first press of
the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray background)
and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through all databases
in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed repeatedly,
the softkey will switch between PFD1 and MFD1. Database status information in the Database Window
will reflect the database of the selected PFD or MFD. After a successful sync and restart, verify the proper
databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page.
If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window. If a synchronization completes on one display, but
an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected display listed after it. When
an error message is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the synchronization can be completed.
A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or ‘Err’ is shown.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database
Synchronization Error
Message
Figure B-13 Synchronization Error Message
INDEX
APPENDICES
Error Message
Description
Canceled
Database synchronization has been canceled by removing the bottom SD card in
display being updated
Card Full
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Err
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
Timeout
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages
436
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES/JEPPESEN CHARTVIEW DATABASE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (flygarmin.com). Jeppesen Chartview can be download from
the Garmin website but operators must contact Jeppesen to subscribe. Once the updated files have been
downloaded from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and
program the new databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. When database files are loaded to the
SD card, any previously loaded database files of the same type residing on the SD card will be overwritten.
This includes loading a database of a different coverage area or data cycle than that currently residing on the
SD card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
»» Windows-compatible PC computer
»» SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
»» Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
»» Supplemental SD Cards
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Updating Basemap, SafeTaxi, Obstacle, and Airport Directory
NOTE: The Basemap, SafeTaxi, Obstacle and Airport Directory databases may be copied to one Supplemental
Data Card, then automatically synchronized to the other cards in the system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the system OFF, remove the Garmin SD Cards from the bottom SD card slot of each flight display unit or
from one display only for automatic synchronization to the other card(s).
2) Go to flygarmin.com. Install the databases on the Garmin SD card for each display, or to one display only for
automatic synchronization to the other card(s).
3) Put the removed Garmin SD Card(s) back in the bottom SD card slot(s).
AFCS
4) Turn the system ON.
5) During MFD power-on, check the MFD power-on screen and make sure the database is initialized and shown
on the database information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure B-14 Database Information on the Power-on Screen
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
6) Press the ENT Key on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
9) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display.
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected
PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-15 Display Database Softkey
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
10) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each display.
Figure B-16 Check Database Cycle Number (MFD shown)
Updating Terrain, Chartview and Flitecharts Databases
AFCS
NOTE: Jeppesen ChartView can be updated at either flygarmin.com or www.jeppesen.com, but must be
purchased first from Jeppesen.
1) With the system OFF, remove the Garmin SD Cards from the bottom SD card slot of each flight display unit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Go to flygarmin.com or www.jeppesen.com (for ChartView only) and install the databases on the Garmin SD
card for each display. (The FliteCharts or ChartView database must only be installed on the MFD SD Card).
3) Put the Garmin SD Cards back in the bottom SD card slots of each flight display unit.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the system ON.
INDEX
5) During MFD power-on, check the MFD Power-On screen and make sure the database is initialized and shown
on the database information.
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure B-17 Database Information on the Power-on Screen
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display.
PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-18 Display Database Softkey
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each display.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-19 Check Database Cycle Number (MFD shown)
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the AHRS
(GRS1). If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation
Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-20 GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed.
AFCS
Figure B-21 Uploading Database to GRS1
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AVIATION TERMS AND ACRONYMS
ACC
ACK
ACT, ACTV
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
AFCS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
ATS
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AVLC
AWOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AEA
AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFN
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRB
AIRMET
AIRREP
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
ALTS
ALTV
AM
AMPS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-R
Annunciation/Annunciator
Antenna
Angle of Attack, ACARS Over AVLC
Aeronautical Operational Control
Aircraft On Ground
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
Autopilot
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Auto Throttle
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Aeronautical Telecommunications
Network
Air Traffic Services
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Aviation VHF Link Control
Automated Weather Observing System
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADC
ADF
ADI
ADIZ
ADS-B
ANNUNC/ANN
ANT
AOA
AOC
AOG
AOPA
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
AT
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
ATN
EIS
ADAHRS
Amps
Advisory Circular, Alternating Current
Airborne Communications Addressing
and Reporting System
Accuracy
Acknowledge
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated
Tilt
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference
System
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Air Defense Identification Zone
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceRebroadcast
Aircraft Electronic Association
Arc to Fix Leg
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
ATS Facilities Notification
Airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Aeronautical Information Manual
Airborne
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Air Reports
Alert
Altitude
Alternator, Alternate
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
Amplitude Modulation
Amperes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A
AC
ACARS
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
BFO
BKSP
Bluetooth
EIS
BOC
BOD
BRG
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Wireless standard for data exchange over
short distances
Bottom of Climb
Bottom of Descent
see also Bearing
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
°C
C
CA
CAL
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CCG
CD
CDA
CDI
CDU
CF
CG
CH, CHNL
CHT
CHKLIST
CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CMC
CN
CNS
INDEX
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
442
Degrees Celsius
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Current Climb Gradient
Course to DME Distance Leg
Current Data Authority
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Center of Gravity
Channel
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Central Maintenance Computer
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
COPLT
Course
Course to
Steer
CPDLC
CPL
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSA
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVDR
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYC CTR
CYL
D ALT
D-ATIS
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCL
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
see also Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Conflict Situational Awareness
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cyclic Centering
Cylinder
Density Altitude
Digital Automatic Terminal Info Service
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Departure Clearance
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
AFCS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DTG
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DL LTNG
DLS
DME
DN
DNALT
DOD
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DSP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Empty, East
Engine and Airframe Systems
Engine Control Unit
Emergency Descent Mode
Expected Further Clearance
DIR
DIS
Distance
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EICAS
Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
System
EIS
Engine Indication System
ELEV
Elevation, Elevator
ELT
Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMER, EMERG, Emergency
EMERGCY
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
END, ENDUR
Endurance
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
ENR
Enroute; ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (ESA) altitude within ten miles left or right of
the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT
Enter
EPE
see also Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ES
Extended Squitter
ESA
see also Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated
A measure of horizontal GPS position
Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
(EPE)
conditions and other factors.
Estimated
The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
(ETA)
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated
The estimated time it takes to reach
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
(ETE)
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
ETA
see also Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
see also Estimated Time Enroute
EVS
Enhanced Vision System
EIS
E
EAS
ECU
EDM
EFC
DES, DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Dilution of
Precision
Efficiency
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DTK
DQR
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Datalink Lightning
Data Link System
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
Density Altitude
Department of Defense
see also Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Datalink Service Provider, Digital Signal
Processor
Distance To Go, Remaining distance to
last active FPL waypoint
see also Desired Track
Data Quality Requirements
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Desired Track
443
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
EXPIRD
Expired
°F
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FANS
FAR
FBO
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Future Air Navigation System
Federal Aviation Regulations
Fixed Base Operator
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
Federal Communication Commission
Forecast
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
Fault Detection and Exclusion
see also Fuel Flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Flight Level
Flight Level Change
Flight Timer
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
Flight Management System
see also Fuel On Board
see also Fuel Over Destination
Flight Path Angle
Flight Plan
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
Frequency
Format
Freezing
Flight System Messages
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FDE
FF, FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FL
FLC
FLT
FLTA
FM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS
FOB
FOD
FPA
FPL
FPM
FREQ
FRMT
FRZ
FSM
FSS
FT
Fuel Flow
444
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
Fuel Over
The estimated fuel remaining when the
Destination
aircraft reaches the destination waypoint,
based upon current fuel flow.
FWD
Forward
G/S
GA
GAGAN
GAGL
GAL, GL
GBOX
GBT
GCU
GCS
GDC
GDL
GDR
GDU
GEA
GEN
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLONASS
GLS
GMA
GMC
GMT
GMU
GND
GOLD
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Glideslope
Go-Around
GPS Aided GEO Augmented Navigation
GPS AGL Altitude
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Based Transceiver
Garmin Control Unit
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Data Radio
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Generator
Geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite
Landing System
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Global Operational Data Link
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
AFCS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Hover
Hover Prediction
INFO
IN Hg
INS
INT
INTEG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
HNS
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
HOV
HOV-P
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
In Ground Effect
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Inertial Navigation System
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HF
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
see also Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional
gyro.
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
see also Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
Hybrid Navigation System
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IEEE
IF
IFR
IG
IGE
ILS
IMC
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HA
HDG
HDOP
Heading
Hectopascal
Hover Power Indicator
Horizontal Protection Level
Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)
EIS
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSD
GSL
GSR
GSU
GTC
GTS
GTX
GW
GWX
hPa
HPI
HPL
HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Groundspeed
One degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the highest
elevation reference point in the grid by:
a) 1,000 feet where the highest elevation
is <5001MSL or b) 2,000 feet where the
highest elevation is >5000MSL
The velocity the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Garmin Data Concentrator
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Satellite Radio
Garmin Sensor Unit
Garmin Touchscreen Controller
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
Gross Weight
Garmin Weather Radar
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Grid MORA
(Minimum
Off—Route
Altitude)
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ISO
ITT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
KEYSTK
KG
kHz
KM
KT
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LDA
LDG
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere; ISA
Relative Temperature
International Standards Organization
Inter-Turbine Temperature, Interstage
Turbine Temperature
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Left, Left Runway
Latitude, Lateral
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Landing Distance Available
ETA at Final Destination
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
LGND
Legend
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LMM
Location Middle Marker
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
Low
LOA
Letter of Authorization
LOC
Localizer
LOI
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
LOM
Location Outer Marker
446
LON
LP
LPV
LRU
LSB V
LT
LTNG
LVL
Longitude, Longitudinal
Localizer Performance
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
Line Replaceable Unit
Lower Sideband Voice
Left
Lightning
Level
M
Meter, Middle Marker, Mach
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic
MAG VAR
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ
Manual Squelch
MANSEQ
Manual Sequence
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MASQ
Master Avionics Squelch
MAX
Maximum
MAXSPD
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
MB
Marker Beacon
MCP
Maximum Continuous Power
MDA
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
MEPT
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
MET
Manual Electric Trim
METAR
Aviation Routine Weather Report
MFD
Multi Function Display
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MGT
Measured Gas Temperature
MHz
Megahertz
MIC
Microphone
MIN
Minimum
Minimum Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (MSA) altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
MKR
Marker Beacon
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
R
RA
RAD
RAD ALT
AFCS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Engine Torque
Field Elevation Pressure
Sea Level Pressure
Quantity
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Out of Ground Effect
Out of the gate, Off the ground, On the
ground, and In the gate
Oxygen
Q
QFE
QNH
QTY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OGE
OOOI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTAM
NP
NR
NRST
North
North Atlantic Tracks System
Navigation
Navigation Aid
Next Data Authority
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Gas Producer Rotation Speed
Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Power Turbine Speed
Rotor Speed
Nearest
Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Personal Computer
Pre-Departure Clearance
Primary Flight Display
Pilot’s Guide
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Pilot Report
Pitch
Plain Old ACARS
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch, Power Situation
Indicator
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power
EIS
N
NATS
NAV
NAVAID
NDA
NDB
NEXRAD
NG
NM
NoPT
P ALT
PA
PASS
PC
PDC
PFD
PG
PI
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POA
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MSG
MSL
MT, M
mV
MVFR
Military Operations Area
Monitor
Movement
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
Meters per Minute
see also Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
Message
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MOA
MON
MOV
MORA
MPEL
MPM
MSA
MSAS
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
RAIM
RVRSNRY
RVSM
RX
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Ram Air Temperature
Receiver
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Router-Based Unrestricted Digital
Interworking Connectivity Solution
Reversionary
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums
Receive
S
SA
SAR
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SELCAL
South
Selective Availability
Search and Rescue
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Selective Calling
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAM
RAT
RCVR
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RMI
RMT
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RUDICS
448
SENS
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIG/AIR
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SMS
SNGL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ, SQL
SRVC, SVC
SSID
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SURF
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS
Sense
Surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
Symbol
Short Message System
Single
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Service
Wireless Service Set Identifier
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Surface
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System
T
TA
True
Traffic Advisory
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
APPENDICES
VSB
VSR
VT
VTIRE
VX
VY
VYSE
V DEV
VA
VAC
VAPP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Volts
Velocity (airspeed)
Takeoff Decision Speed
Takeoff Safety Speed
Maneuvering Speed
Approach Climb Speed
Maximum Flap Extended Speed
Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed
Approach Speed (Flaps at x°)
Maximum Landing Gear Operating Speed
Minimum Control Speed
Maximum Operating Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Takeoff Rotate Speed
Landing Approach Speed, Reference
Landing Speed
Maximum Speedbrake Speed
Stall Speed
Takeoff Flap Retraction Speed
Maximum Tire Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Best Rate of Climb Speed
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
Vertical Deviation
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
Volts Alternating Current
VOR Approach
AFCS
V
V, Vspeed
V1
V2
VA
VAPP , VAC
VFE
VLE
VLNDx
VLO
VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VREF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Universal Access Transceiver
Ultra-High Frequency
Unavailable
United States
Upper Sideband Voice
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
UAT
UHF
UNAVAIL
US
USB V
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transmit
EIS
190-02692-00 Rev. A
TX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TWIP
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
Temporary Flight Restriction
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
Turbine Inlet Temperature
see also Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent, Time to TOD
Take-Off, Go-Around
Takeoff and Landing Data
Topographic
Takeoff Run Available
Total
Traffic Pattern Altitude
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
see also Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIS-B
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOLD
TOPO
TORA
TOT
TPA
Track
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VAR
VD
VDC
VDL
VERT
Vertical Figure
of Merit
Vertical Speed
Required
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VFOM
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL
VOR
VORTAC
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF
Vertical Speed Indicator
see also Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final
W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WI-FI, WIFI
WOG
WOW
WPT
WT
WW
WX
Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Wireless Local Area Network based on
IEEE 802.11
Weight on Gear
Weight on Wheels
Waypoint(s)
Weight
World Wide
Weather
XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
XMIT
XMSN
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
Transmit
Transmission
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track, Crosstrack Error
YD
Yaw Damper
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF
VR
VRP
VS
VSD
Variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
Volts Direct Current
VHF Datalink
Vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
see also Vertical Figure of Merit
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Visual Reporting Point
Vertical Speed
Vertical Situation Display
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa.
The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
-- Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
-- Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
-- Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
APPENDICES
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL altitude?
EIS
GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the active flight plan is
erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
system automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an
approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 and ETSO C145
Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the current version of
the pertinent flight manual as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
INDEX
APPENDICES
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Normal (OBS not activated)
OBS
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach course • Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why might the system not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and pressing the ACT Leg Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
AFCS
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
-- A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
-- A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
-- The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate the midpoint of the turn has been crossed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
When does the CDI scale change?
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
Once a departure is activated, the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3 nm. The
CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm from the
departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm back
to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT Leg Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The system provides navigation along
the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the desired
transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
INDEX
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
B
Barometric Altimeter Setting.......................................44
Basic Empty Weight..........................................249, 250
Basic Operating Weight............................................250
Battery current.........................................................102
Bearing/Distance, Measuring....................................151
Bearing Information Window................................45, 57
Bearing Pointer..........................................................56
Bearing Source...........................................................57
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
C
AFCS
Cargo ....................................................................250
Caution....................................................................416
CELL MOV Softkey....................................................274
Chart Not Available..........................................387, 397
Chart Options..................................................390, 401
CHART SETUP Box............................................392, 401
ChartView........................................................381, 385
Checklists........................................................409–410
Checklist Softkeys.....................................................409
City Forecast............................................................279
CLD TOP Softkey.......................................................272
Closest Point............................................................214
COM channel spacing..............................................114
COM frequency box..........................................105, 108
Communication (COM) Frequency Box........................44
COM tuning failure..................................................139
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA)........................363
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Approach Service Levels...........................................239
Arrival Alerts............................................................220
Arrivals............................................................236, 238
Attitude.......................................................................1
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS).... 2, 8, 9
Attitude Indicator.................................................44, 48
Audio alerting system...............................................415
Audio Panel.............................................................2, 6
Audio Panel fail-safe operation.................................139
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
(ADS-R)....................................................................362
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)....................379
Automatic squelch...................................................115
Auto North Up.........................................................146
Auto-tuning, COM....................................................110
Auto-tuning, NAV.....................................................119
Auto-tuning NAV frequencies...................................123
Auto Zoom...............................................................146
Aviation Symbols......................................................155
Aviation terms and acronyms....................................441
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active database...............................................431, 432
Active frequency...............................................108, 117
AC-U-KWIK.............................................. 381, 434, 435
ADF receiver modes..................................................126
ADF tuning..............................................................125
ADF volume.............................................................126
AIRB ....................................................................366
Airconditioning door alert.........................................418
Aircraft alerts...........................................................417
AIREP ....................................................................287
Airport Directory...............................................381, 434
Airport Information..................................................175
Airspace...........................................................156, 189
Airspace Alerts.................................................191, 256
Airspeed Indicator................................................44, 46
Airspeed Trend Vector..............................................46
Airways
Collapsed..............................................................211
Expanded..............................................................211
In a Flight Plan......................................................207
Alerts
Airspace..................................................................34
Arrival.....................................................................34
Audio......................................................................33
Audio voice...........................................................418
Along Track Offset............................................211, 212
Altimeter........................................................44, 49–52
Altitude Selection Bug.......................................49–50
Altitude Trend Vector..........................................49–50
Barometric Setting...................................................50
STD BARO...............................................................51
Complementary Unit Overlay...................................50
Altitude Constraint...........................................230, 232
Annunciations
Abnormal GPS.........................................................84
Altitude Alerting......................................................81
Baro Transition Alert.................................................51
Low Altitude............................................................82
Marker Beacon........................................................81
Minimum Altitude....................................................82
System......................................................................7
Test tone.........................................................35, 415
AOPA ..................................................... 381, 434, 435
Approach.................................................................452
Approaches..............................................................238
Activating..............................................................243
Loading.................................................................242
Missed Approach...................................................244
Removing..............................................................244
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
I-1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Controls
PFD/MFD.....................................................16–17, 24
Softkeys............................................................18–21
Correlation...............................................................363
Course
Pointer..............................................................53, 58
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)...........................33, 58
Changing scale......................................................453
Crosstrack Error.......................................................58
Flight Phase.......................................... 54, 58, 60–63
GPS CDI Scaling................................................60–63
Lateral Deviation Scale.......................................54, 58
Navigation Source.............................................58, 59
Crew Alerting System (CAS)
Annunciations.......................................................417
Inhibits..................................................................418
Crew Profiles..............................................................27
Cyclone....................................................................284
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
D
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Database(s).................................................... 5, 35, 429
Database Synchronization................................430, 435
Database synchronization error.................................436
Data Entry............................................................23–24
Data Link Receiver....................................................413
Data Logging...........................................................408
Date/Time..................................................................30
Day/Night Views...............................................392, 401
Day View..................................................................393
Dead Reckoning.................................................84, 256
Declutter..................................................................160
Departures.......................................................234, 236
Departure Time.........................................................252
Dilution of Precision (DOP).........................................12
Direct-To.......................................... 193, 194, 195, 196
Display and Key Backlighting (Brightness)...................41
Display backup.........................................................107
Display Backup.............................................................6
Display Units (Units of Measure).................................32
DME audio...............................................................117
DME Information Window....................................56, 58
DME tuning..............................................................127
Dual navigation database.........................................432
E
INDEX
ECHO TOP Softkey....................................................271
Electronic Checklists................................. 409, 410, 411
Emergency Checklist.................................................410
Emergency frequency.......................................105, 139
I-2
Engine
Leaning.............................................................93, 97
Engine Indication System (EIS)..............................90–93
Engine manifold pressure....................... 91, 93, 99, 102
Estimated Position Error (EPE).....................................12
Excess Fuel Weight...................................................251
Exporting a Flight Plan.............................................221
F
Field of View (SVT)...................................................166
Flight Data Logging..................................................381
Flight ID...................................................................128
Flight Instruments......................................................46
Flight Path Angle (FPA).............................................230
Flight plan
Storing..................................................................452
Flight Planning
Activating a Leg.....................................................211
Airways.........................................................207–211
Leg Type................................................................198
Storing..................................................................225
Waypoints.....................................................204–207
Flight Plan Views......................................................201
FliteCharts.......................................................381, 395
FliteCharts Functions................................................396
Freezing Levels.........................................................280
Frequency spacing....................................................114
Frequently asked questions.......................................451
Fuel
Calculations....................................................94, 100
Efficiency...............................................................254
Endurance.............................................................254
Flow ...............................................................99, 102
Flow totalizer........................................................100
Remaining.............................................................254
Remaining, calculated............................................100
Required...............................................................254
Reserve...................................................................94
Statistics................................................................254
Used, calculated....................................................102
Fuel flow indicator...............................................91, 94
Fuel on Board..........................................................251
Fuel range ring...........................................................94
Fuel Range Ring.......................................................165
G
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL).......................... 311, 316, 325
Glidepath Indicator....................................................53
Glideslope Indicator.............................................52–53
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
INDEX
OBS Mode.................................................................63
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)............................452–453
Orientation..............................................................144
Other Statistics.........................................................254
Outside Air Temperature.............................................44
Overlay Approaches..................................................238
Overview......................................................................1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
O
APPENDICES
Magnetometer.......................................................1, 10
Map Panning...........................................................148
Map Symbols...........................................................154
Marker beacon.........................................................123
Marker Beacon Annunciations....................................81
Master avionics squelch............................................103
Menus ......................................................................23
Metric Units...............................................................50
Minimum Altitude Alerting....................................45, 83
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
M
AFCS
Land Symbols...........................................................154
Leaning, engine..........................................................97
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)........................................2
LO SENS...................................................................124
Loss of GPS......................................................240, 256
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
L
National Weather Service..........................................283
NAV1 audio.............................................................117
NAV2 audio.............................................................117
NAV frequency box...................................................105
Navigation mode selection.......................................117
Navigation (NAV)
Status Box...............................................................34
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box................................44
Navigation Source................................................58–60
Navigation Status Box................................................44
Nav radio selection...................................................117
Nav Range Ring.......................................................164
Nearest
Airports................................... 34, 172, 173, 174, 175
Airspaces......................................................190, 191
Intersections..........................................................176
NDB ....................................................................178
VOR ....................................................................180
VRP .............................................................181, 182
Nearest airports frequency tuning.............................110
NEXRAD Softkey......................................................267
NextGen..................................................................362
Night View...............................................................394
Normal display operation..............................................6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ID indicator..............................................................118
Importing a Flight Plan.............................................220
Indicated Airspeed......................................................46
Inset Map..................................................................45
Intersection
Information...................................................176–177
Nearest.................................................................176
Inverting a Flight Plan......................................224, 226
IOI
............................................................322, 332
N
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
I
EIS
Heading.....................................................................44
Heading Selection Bug...............................................44
HI SENS...................................................................124
Horizontal Situation Indicator...............................44, 53
HSI double green arrow............................................117
HSI magenta arrow..................................................117
HSI single green arrow.............................................117
Hurricane.................................................................284
Minimums................................................................418
Miscellaneous Map Symbols.....................................162
Missed Approach..............................................244, 245
MKR/MUTE..............................................................123
Mode S....................................................................128
Morse code identifier................................................118
Motion Vectors.........................................................370
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Controls............................................................16–17
Page Groups............................................................24
Music 1/Music 2.......................................................137
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
H
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Receiver..................................................................11
Receiver Autonomous Augmentation System (RAIM).13
Satellilte Constellation Diagram...............................12
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)...........15
Satellite Signal Status..............................................12
Satellite Signal Strength...........................................15
GPS Approaches.......................................................238
I-3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
P
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Parallel Track....................................................213, 214
Passenger Address....................................................135
Passengers...............................................................250
Pilot and Stores Weight............................................250
PIREP .....................................................................287
Power-up Page.........................................................409
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Controls............................................................16–17
Softkeys............................................................18–20
Profile View..............................................................152
Q
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Quick-tuning emergency 121.50...............................110
R
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar Altitude..........................................................363
Range, Zoom............................................................146
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
(RAIM) ........................................................13–14, 451
Reserve fuel...............................................................94
Reversionary mode...................................................139
Reversionary Mode.................................................6, 85
ROC .............................................................322, 332
RX indicator.............................................................108
S
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SafeTaxi...........................................................381, 382
SBAS .............................................................239, 451
Scheduler/Scheduled Messages.............................38–39
Secure Digital (SD) card............................................409
Secure Digital (SD) Card...........................................429
Secure Digital (SD) Cards..............................................4
Selected Altitude........................................................49
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc..................................167
Selected Course...................................................45, 55
Selected Heading.................................................45, 54
Sequencing waypoints
Automatic.............................................................453
Service Class............................................................403
SIGMET....................................................................275
SiriusXM
Radio....................................................................402
Receiver Troubleshooting.......................................412
SiriusXM Active Channel...........................................404
SiriusXM Channel List...............................................404
SiriusXM Presets......................................................405
SiriusXM Radio Volume............................................406
SiriusXM Satellite Radio............................................402
I-4
SiriusXM Weather
AIRMETs...............................................................275
Slip/Skid Indicator................................................44, 48
Softkeys.....................................................................44
EIS ....................................................................100
LTNG.....................................................................273
Speaker....................................................................133
Split COM operation.................................................136
Standby alternator alert....................................417, 418
Standby frequency............................................108, 117
Standby frequency field............................................108
Standby Navigation Database... 432, 433, 434, 438, 439
Stereo headsets........................................................133
Stormscope..............................................................305
Cell and Strike Mode.............................................306
Setup....................................................................306
Stuck microphone....................................................139
SURF .....................................................................366
Surface Analysis.......................................................279
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...............................68
Airport Signs.....................................................70, 76
Field of View...............................68, 72, 73, 77, 79, 80
Flight Path Marker...................................................74
Horizon Heading................................................70, 75
Pathways...........................................................69–74
Runways.................................................................76
Terrain and Obstacle Alerting...................................77
Traffic......................................................................75
Zero Pitch Line.........................................................75
System
Annunciations...........................................................7
Block Diagram...........................................................3
Message advisories................................................419
Power........................................................................5
Setup Page........................................................26–34
Status Page.............................................................35
System annunciations...............................................415
System Time...............................................................44
T
TA
.....................................................................418
TAF ............................................................276, 277
TAS Traffic
Non-Threat Traffic..................................................342
TAWS-B Alerts..........................................................330
Excessive Descent Rate Alert..................................333
Five-Hundred Aural Alert........................................336
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)..............334
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff Alert..................336
Premature Descent Alerting....................................334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
INDEX
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Trip Planning....................................................253, 254
True Airspeed.......................................................44, 46
Turbulence...............................................................286
Turn anticipation......................................................453
Turn Rate Indicator...............................................44, 56
TX indicator.............................................................108
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
U
Unable to Display Chart....................................387, 397
Unusual Attitudes.......................................................85
User-Defined Holding Pattern...........................215, 218
User Waypoints........................................................182
Using XM Radio.......................................................403
EIS
V
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Navigation...................................................228
VNAV Direct-To.....................................................229
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications..........................66
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI)...................67
Target Altitude............................................. 50, 66, 67
Vertical Deviation Indicator................................45, 52
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)................................44, 52
VFR code.................................................................131
Voice Alerts, TIS Traffic......................................345, 418
Volume....................................................................406
VOR selection...........................................................117
VRP .................................................... 155, 181, 182
Vspeed References...............................................46, 47
VS TGT.....................................................................230
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
W
WAAS ....................................................................451
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing...........................................453
Skipped.................................................................453
Waypoint Selection Submenu............................194, 203
Weight Calculator....................................................249
Wind Data...........................................................65, 66
Winds Aloft..............................................................281
WIND Softkey...........................................................281
Wind Vector, MFD.....................................................163
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TAWS-B Page...........................................................329
TCAS I Traffic
Alerts....................................................................352
Altitude Display.....................................................356
Operation..............................................................354
System Status........................................................360
System Test............................................................353
Traffic Map Page....................................................354
Temperature Compensation......................................246
For Approach Altitudes...........................................246
For Approach Minimums........................................248
Temperatures
International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)..................65
Outside Air Tempurature..........................................65
Outside Air Tempurature (OAT).................................44
Terminal Procedures Charts..............................386, 397
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(TAWS)............................................ 317, 319, 325, 338
Alerts....................................................................333
System Status........................................................337
Terrain Proximity......................................................311
Terrain-SVS......................................................316, 379
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance........................323
System Status........................................................323
Timer
Departure Timer.......................................................38
Flight Timer.............................................................38
Generic...................................................................43
Generic Timer..........................................................36
TOPO Data...............................................................153
TOPO Scale..............................................................154
Track Indicator............................................................54
Track Vector.............................................................162
Traffic Advisory (TA)..................................................418
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).............363
Traffic Information Service (TIS).................................342
Transponder code entry............................................131
Transponder data box.......................................103, 105
Transponder mode selection.....................................129
Transponder standby mode.......................................129
Transponder Status Box..............................................44
Trend Vector
Airspeed..................................................................46
Altitude...................................................................49
Turn Rate................................................................56
X
XM Radio entertainment..........................................137
INDEX
190-02692-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
I-5
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Blank Page
I-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-32 Saratoga
190-02692-00 Rev. A
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide Piper PA-32 Saratoga
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support or view
warranty information at flygarmin.com.
190-02692-00
Revision A
Piper PA-32 Saratoga
System Software Version 2824.02 or later